AM70PDL127CDH85IT [AMD]
2 x 64 Megabit (8 M x 16-Bit) CMOS 3.0 Volt-Only Page Mode Flash Memory Data Storage 128 Megabit (8 M x 16-Bit) CMOS; 2× 64兆比特(8M ×16位) CMOS 3.0伏只页面模式闪存数据存储128兆比特(8M ×16位) CMOS型号: | AM70PDL127CDH85IT |
厂家: | AMD |
描述: | 2 x 64 Megabit (8 M x 16-Bit) CMOS 3.0 Volt-Only Page Mode Flash Memory Data Storage 128 Megabit (8 M x 16-Bit) CMOS |
文件: | 总127页 (文件大小:1923K) |
中文: | 中文翻译 | 下载: | 下载PDF数据表文档文件 |
Am70PDL127CDH/
Am70PDL129CDH
Data Sheet
July 2003
The following document specifies Spansion memory products that are now offered by both Advanced
Micro Devices and Fujitsu. Although the document is marked with the name of the company that orig-
inally developed the specification, these products will be offered to customers of both AMD and
Fujitsu.
Continuity of Specifications
There is no change to this datasheet as a result of offering the device as a Spansion product. Any
changes that have been made are the result of normal datasheet improvement and are noted in the
document revision summary, where supported. Future routine revisions will occur when appropriate,
and changes will be noted in a revision summary.
Continuity of Ordering Part Numbers
AMD and Fujitsu continue to support existing part numbers beginning with “Am” and “MBM”. To order
these products, please use only the Ordering Part Numbers listed in this document.
For More Information
Please contact your local AMD or Fujitsu sales office for additional information about Spansion
memory solutions.
Publication Number 30651 Revision A Amendment +2 Issue Date November 24, 2003
THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK.
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
Stacked Multi-Chip Package (MCP/XIP) Flash Memory,
Data storage MirrorBit Flash, and pSRAM (XIP)
2 x 64 Megabit (8 M x 16-Bit) CMOS 3.0 Volt-Only Page Mode Flash Memory Data Storage
128 Megabit (8 M x 16-Bit) CMOS 3.0 Volt-only, Simultaneous Operation Flash Memory and
64 Mbit (4 M x 16-Bit) CMOS Pseudo Static RAM
DISTINCTIVE CHARACTERISTICS
—
—
Bank 2A: 16 Mbit (4 Kw x 8 and 32 Kw x 31)
Bank 2B: 48 Mbit (32 Kw x 96)
MCP Features
■ Consists of Am29PDL127H/Am29PDL129H, 64 Mb
■ SecSiTM (Secured Silicon) Sector region
pSRAM and two Am29LV640M.
—
—
—
Up to 128 words accessible through a command sequence
■ Power supply voltage of 2.7 to 3.1 volt
Up to 64 factory-locked words
■ High performance (XIP)
Up to 64 customer-lockable words
—
Access time as fast as 65 ns initial / 25 ns page
■ High performance (Data Storage)
Access time as fast as 110 ns initial / 30 ns page
■ Package
■ Both top and bottom boot blocks in one device
■ Manufactured on 0.13 µm process technology
■ 20-year data retention at 125°C
—
—
93-Ball FBGA
■ Minimum 1 million erase cycle guarantee per sector
■ Operating Temperature
—
–40°C to +85°C
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
■ High Performance
Flash Memory Features (XIP)
—
—
Page access times as fast as 25 ns
Random access times as fast as 65 ns
AM29PDL127H/AM29PDL129H
ARCHITECTURAL ADVANTAGES
■ Power consumption (typical values at 10 MHz)
—
—
—
45 mA active read current
25 mA program/erase current
1 µA typical standby mode current
■ 128 Mbit Page Mode device
—
Page size of 8 words: Fast page read access from random
locations within the page
■ Dual Chip Enable inputs (PDL129 only)
SOFTWARE FEATURES
—
Two CE# inputs control selection of each half of the memory
space
■ Software command-set compatible with JEDEC 42.4
standard
■ Single power supply operation
—
Backward compatible with Am29F and Am29LV families
—
Full Voltage range: 2.7 to 3.1 volt read, erase, and program
operations for battery-powered applications
■ CFI (Common Flash Interface) complaint
—
Provides device-specific information to the system, allowing
host software to easily reconfigure for different Flash devices
■ Simultaneous Read/Write Operation
—
Data can be continuously read from one bank while
executing erase/program functions in another bank
Zero latency switching from write to read operations
■ Erase Suspend / Erase Resume
—
—
Suspends an erase operation to allow read or program
operations in other sectors of same bank
■ FlexBank Architecture
4 separate banks, with up to two simultaneous operations
per device
PDL127:
■ Unlock Bypass Program command
—
—
Reduces overall programming time when issuing multiple
program command sequences
—
—
—
—
Bank A: 16 Mbit (4 Kw x 8 and 32 Kw x 31)
Bank B: 48 Mbit (32 Kw x 96)
Bank C: 48 Mbit (32 Kw x 96)
Bank D: 16 Mbit (4 Kw x 8 and 32 Kw x 31)
HARDWARE FEATURES
■ Ready/Busy# pin (RY/BY#)
—
Provides a hardware method of detecting program or erase
cycle completion
PDL129:
—
—
Bank 1A: 48 Mbit (32 Kw x 96)
Bank 1B: 16 Mbit (4 Kw x 8 and 32 Kw x 31)
■ Hardware reset pin (RESET#)
Hardware method to reset the device to reading array data
—
Publication# 30651 Rev: A Amendment +2
Issue Date: November 24, 2003
This document contains information on a product under development at Advanced Micro Devices. The information
is intended to help you evaluate this product. AMD reserves the right to change or discontinue work on this proposed
product without notice.
Refer to AMD’s Website (www.amd.com) for the latest information.
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
—
—
At VIH, allows removal of sector protection
At VHH, provides accelerated programming in a factory
setting
■ WP#/ACC (Write Protect/Acceleration) input
—
At VIL, hardware level protection for the first and last two 4K
word sectors.
FLASH MEMORY FEATURES (DATA STORAGE)
AM29LV640M ARCHITECTURAL ADVANTAGES
■ Single power supply operation
■ Low power consumption (typical values at 3.0 V, 5
MHz)
— 30 mA typical active read current
— 50 mA typical erase/program current
— 1 µA typical standby mode current
— 3 V for read, erase, and program operations
■ Manufactured on 0.23 µm MirrorBit process
technology
■ SecSi™ (Secured Silicon) Sector region
SOFTWARE & HARDWARE FEATURES
— 128-word/256-byte sector for permanent, secure
identification through an 8-word/16-byte random
Electronic Serial Number, accessible through a
command sequence
■ Software features
— Program Suspend & Resume: read other sectors
before programming operation is completed
— Erase Suspend & Resume: read/program other
sectors before an erase operation is completed
— May be programmed and locked at the factory or by
the customer
— Data# polling & toggle bits provide status
■ Flexible sector architecture
— Unlock Bypass Program command reduces overall
multiple-word programming time
— One hundred twenty-eight 32 Kword sectors
— CFI (Common Flash Interface) compliant: allows host
system to identify and accommodate multiple flash
devices
■ Compatibility with JEDEC standards
— Provides pinout and software compatibility for
single-power supply flash, and superior inadvertent
write protection
■ Hardware features
— Sector Group Protection: hardware-level method of
preventing write operations within a sector group
■ Minimum 100,000 erase cycle guarantee per sector
■ 20-year data retention at 125°C
— Temporary Sector Unprotect: VID-level method of
changing code in locked sectors
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
■ High performance
— WP#/ACC input:
Write Protect input (WP#) protects first or last sector
regardless of sector protection settings
ACC (high voltage) accelerates programming time for
higher throughput during system production
— 110 ns access time
— 30 ns page read times
— 0.5 s typical sector erase time
— 22 µs typical effective write buffer word programming
time: 16-word write buffer reduces overall
— Hardware reset input (RESET#) resets device
— Ready/Busy# output (RY/BY#) indicates program or
erase cycle completion
programming time for multiple-word updates
— 4-word page read buffer
— 16-word write buffer
2
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
■ Data retention supply voltage: 2.7 to 3.1 V
pSRAM Features
■ Power down features using CE#1s and CE2s
■ CE1s# and CE2s Chip Select
■ Power dissipation
—
—
—
Operating: 35 mA maximum
Standby: 80 µA maximum
Deep power-down standby: 20 µA
■ Byte data control: LB#s (DQ7-DQ0), UB#s (DQ15-DQ8)
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
3
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
GENERAL DESCRIPTION (PDL129)
The Am29PDL129H is a 128 Mbit, 3.0 volt-only Page Mode
and Simultaneous Read/Write Flash memory device orga-
nized as 8 Mwords. The word-wide data (x16) appears on
DQ15-DQ0. This device can be programmed in-system or in
standard EPROM programmers. A 12.0 V VPP is not required
for write or erase operations.
The device is entirely command set compatible with the
JEDEC 42.4 single-power-supply Flash standard. Com-
mands are written to the command register using standard
microprocessor write timing. Register contents serve as in-
puts to an internal state-machine that controls the erase and
programming circuitry. Write cycles also internally latch ad-
dresses and data needed for the programming and erase
operations. Reading data out of the device is similar to read-
ing from other Flash or EPROM devices.
The device offers fast page access time of 25 and 30 ns,
with corresponding random access times of 65 and 85 ns,
respectively, allowing high speed microprocessors to oper-
ate without wait states. To eliminate bus contention the de-
vice has separate chip enable (CE#f1, CE#f2), write enable
(WE#) and output enable (OE#) controls. Dual Chip Enables
allow access to two 64 Mbit partitions of the 128 Mbit mem-
ory space.
Device programming occurs by executing the program com-
mand sequence. The Unlock Bypass mode facilitates faster
programming times by requiring only two write cycles to pro-
gram data instead of four. Device erasure occurs by execut-
ing the erase command sequence.
The host system can detect whether a program or erase op-
eration is complete by reading the DQ7 (Data# Polling) and
DQ6 (toggle) status bits. After a program or erase cycle has
been completed, the device is ready to read array data or ac-
cept another command.
Simultaneous Read/Write Operation with
Zero Latency
The Simultaneous Read/Write architecture provides simul-
taneous operation by dividing the memory space into 4
banks, which can be considered to be four separate memory
arrays as far as certain operations are concerned. The de-
vice can improve overall system performance by allowing a
host system to program or erase in one bank, then immedi-
ately and simultaneously read from another bank with zero
latency (with two simultaneous operations operating at any
one time). This releases the system from waiting for the
completion of a program or erase operation, greatly improv-
ing system performance.
The sector erase architecture allows memory sectors to be
erased and reprogrammed without affecting the data con-
tents of other sectors. The device is fully erased when
shipped from the factory.
Hardware data protection measures include a low VCC de-
tector that automatically inhibits write operations during
power transitions. The hardware sector protection feature
disables both program and erase operations in any combina-
tion of sectors of memory. This can be achieved in-system or
via programming equipment.
The device can be organized in both top and bottom sector
configurations. The banks are organized as follows:
The Erase Suspend/Erase Resume feature enables the
user to put erase on hold for any period of time to read data
from, or program data to, any sector that is not selected for
erasure. True background erase can thus be achieved. If a
read is needed from the SecSi Sector area (One Time Pro-
gram area) after an erase suspend, then the user must use
the proper command sequence to enter and exit this region.
Chip Enable Configuration
CE#f1 Control
CE#f2 Control
Bank 1A
Bank 2A
48 Mbit (32 Kw x 96)
16 Mbit (4 Kw x 8 and 32 Kw x 31)
Bank 1B
Bank 2B
16 Mbit (4 Kw x 8 and 32 Kw x 31)
48 Mbit (32 Kw x 96)
Page Mode Features
The page size is 8 words. After initial page access is accom-
plished, the page mode operation provides fast read access
speed of random locations within that page.
The device offers two power-saving features. When ad-
dresses have been stable for a specified amount of time, the
device enters the automatic sleep mode. The system can
also place the device into the standby mode. Power con-
sumption is greatly reduced in both these modes.
Standard Flash Memory Features
AMD’s Flash technology combined years of Flash memory
manufacturing experience to produce the highest levels of
quality, reliability and cost effectiveness. The device electri-
cally erases all bits within a sector simultaneously via
Fowler-Nordheim tunneling. The data is programmed using
hot electron injection.
The device requires a single 3.0 volt power supply (2.7 V
to 3.1 V) for both read and write functions. Internally gener-
ated and regulated voltages are provided for the program
and erase operations.
4
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
GENERAL DESCRIPTION (PDL127)
The Am29PDL127H is a 128 Mbit, 3.0 volt-only Page Mode
and Simultaneous Read/Write Flash memory device orga-
nized as 8 Mwords. The word-wide data (x16) appears on
DQ15-DQ0. This device can be programmed in-system or in
standard EPROM programmers. A 12.0 V VPP is not required
for write or erase operations.
microprocessor write timing. Register contents serve as in-
puts to an internal state-machine that controls the erase and
programming circuitry. Write cycles also internally latch ad-
dresses and data needed for the programming and erase
operations. Reading data out of the device is similar to read-
ing from other Flash or EPROM devices.
The device offers fast page access time of 25 and 30 ns,
with corresponding random access times of 65 and 85 ns,
respectively, allowing high speed microprocessors to oper-
ate without wait states. To eliminate bus contention the de-
vice has separate chip enable (CE#f1), write enable (WE#)
and output enable (OE#) controls. Simultaneous Read/Write
Operation with Zero Latency
Device programming occurs by executing the program com-
mand sequence. The Unlock Bypass mode facilitates faster
programming times by requiring only two write cycles to pro-
gram data instead of four. Device erasure occurs by execut-
ing the erase command sequence.
The host system can detect whether a program or erase op-
eration is complete by reading the DQ7 (Data# Polling) and
DQ6 (toggle) status bits. After a program or erase cycle has
been completed, the device is ready to read array data or ac-
cept another command.
The Simultaneous Read/Write architecture provides simul-
taneous operation by dividing the memory space into 4
banks, which can be considered to be four separate memory
arrays as far as certain operations are concerned. The de-
vice can improve overall system performance by allowing a
host system to program or erase in one bank, then immedi-
ately and simultaneously read from another bank with zero
latency (with two simultaneous operations operating at any
one time). This releases the system from waiting for the
completion of a program or erase operation, greatly improv-
ing system performance.
The sector erase architecture allows memory sectors to be
erased and reprogrammed without affecting the data con-
tents of other sectors. The device is fully erased when
shipped from the factory.
Hardware data protection measures include a low VCC de-
tector that automatically inhibits write operations during
power transitions. The hardware sector protection feature
disables both program and erase operations in any combina-
tion of sectors of memory. This can be achieved in-system or
via programming equipment.
The device can be organized in both top and bottom sector
configurations. The banks are organized as follows:
Bank
Sectors
The Erase Suspend/Erase Resume feature enables the
user to put erase on hold for any period of time to read data
from, or program data to, any sector that is not selected for
erasure. True background erase can thus be achieved. If a
read is needed from the SecSi Sector area (One Time Pro-
gram area) after an erase suspend, then the user must use
the proper command sequence to enter and exit this region.
A
B
C
D
16 Mbit (4 Kw x 8 and 32 Kw x 31)
48 Mbit (32 Kw x 96)
48 Mbit (32 Kw x 96)
16 Mbit (4 Kw x 8 and 32 Kw x 31)
Page Mode Features
The page size is 8 words. After initial page access is accom-
plished, the page mode operation provides fast read access
speed of random locations within that page.
The device offers two power-saving features. When ad-
dresses have been stable for a specified amount of time, the
device enters the automatic sleep mode. The system can
also place the device into the standby mode. Power con-
sumption is greatly reduced in both these modes.
Standard Flash Memory Features
The device requires a single 3.0 volt power supply (2.7 V
to 3.1 V) for both read and write functions. Internally gener-
ated and regulated voltages are provided for the program
and erase operations.
AMD’s Flash technology combined years of Flash memory
manufacturing experience to produce the highest levels of
quality, reliability and cost effectiveness. The device electri-
cally erases all bits within a sector simultaneously via
Fowler-Nordheim tunneling. The data is programmed using
hot electron injection.
The device is entirely command set compatible with the
JEDEC 42.4 single-power-supply Flash standard. Com-
mands are written to the command register using standard
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
5
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Product Selector Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
MCP Block Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Connection Diagram–PDL129H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Special Package Handling Instructions .................................. 10
Connection Diagram–PDL127H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Special Package Handling Instructions .................................. 11
Pin Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Write Pulse “Glitch” Protection ............................................ 43
Logical Inhibit ....................................................................... 43
Power-Up Write Inhibit ......................................................... 43
Command Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Reading Array Data ................................................................ 47
Reset Command ..................................................................... 47
Autoselect Command Sequence ............................................ 47
Enter SecSi™ Sector/Exit SecSi Sector
Requirements for Reading Array Data ................................... 16
Random Read (Non-Page Read) ........................................ 16
Page Mode Read ................................................................ 16
Table 2. Page Select .......................................................................16
Simultaneous Operation ......................................................... 16
Table 3. Bank Select (PDL129H) ....................................................16
Table 4. Bank Select (PDL127H) ....................................................16
Writing Commands/Command Sequences ............................ 17
Accelerated Program Operation .......................................... 17
Autoselect Functions ........................................................... 17
Standby Mode ........................................................................ 17
Command Sequence .............................................................. 48
Word Program Command Sequence ...................................... 48
Unlock Bypass Command Sequence .................................. 48
Figure 4. Program Operation ......................................................... 49
Chip Erase Command Sequence ........................................... 49
Sector Erase Command Sequence ........................................ 49
Figure 5. Erase Operation.............................................................. 50
Erase Suspend/Erase Resume Commands ........................... 50
Password Program Command ................................................ 50
Password Verify Command .................................................... 51
Password Protection Mode Locking Bit Program Command .. 51
Persistent Sector Protection Mode Locking Bit Program Com-
mand ....................................................................................... 51
SecSi Sector Protection Bit Program Command .................... 51
PPB Lock Bit Set Command ................................................... 51
DYB Write Command ............................................................. 51
Password Unlock Command .................................................. 52
PPB Program Command ........................................................ 52
All PPB Erase Command ........................................................ 52
DYB Write Command ............................................................. 52
PPB Lock Bit Set Command ................................................... 52
PPB Status Command ............................................................ 52
PPB Lock Bit Status Command .............................................. 52
Automatic Sleep Mode ........................................................... 17
RESET#: Hardware Reset Pin ............................................... 18
Output Disable Mode .............................................................. 18
Table 5. SecSiTM Sector Addresses ................................................18
Table 6. Am29PDL127H Sector Architecture ..................................19
Table 7. Am29PDL129H Sector Architecture ..................................26
Table 8. Am29PDL127H Boot Sector/Sector Block Addresses for Pro-
tection/Unprotection ........................................................................34
Table 9. Am29PDL129H Boot Sector/Sector Block Addresses for Pro-
tection/Unprotection
CE#f1 Control ..................................................................................35
Table 10. Am29PDL129H Boot Sector/Sector Block Addresses for
Protection/Unprotection
CE#f2 Control ..................................................................................35
Sector Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Sector Protection Status Command ....................................... 52
Command Definitions Tables .................................................. 53
Table 16. Memory Array Command Definitions ............................. 53
Table 17. Sector Protection Command Definitions ........................ 54
Write Operation Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
DQ7: Data# Polling ................................................................. 55
Figure 6. Data# Polling Algorithm .................................................. 55
RY/BY#: Ready/Busy# ............................................................ 56
DQ6: Toggle Bit I .................................................................... 56
Figure 7. Toggle Bit Algorithm........................................................ 56
DQ2: Toggle Bit II ................................................................... 57
Reading Toggle Bits DQ6/DQ2 ............................................... 57
DQ5: Exceeded Timing Limits ................................................ 57
DQ3: Sector Erase Timer ....................................................... 57
Table 18. Write Operation Status ................................................... 58
Absolute Maximum Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Figure 8. Maximum Negative Overshoot Waveform ...................... 59
Figure 9. Maximum Positive Overshoot Waveform........................ 59
DC Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
pSRAM DC Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Recommended DC Operating Conditions (Note 1) ................ 61
Persistent Sector Protection ................................................... 36
Persistent Protection Bit (PPB) ............................................ 36
Persistent Protection Bit Lock (PPB Lock) .......................... 36
Dynamic Protection Bit (DYB) ............................................. 36
Table 11. Sector Protection Schemes .............................................37
Persistent Sector Protection Mode Locking Bit ................... 37
Password Protection Mode ..................................................... 37
Password and Password Mode Locking Bit ........................ 38
64-bit Password ................................................................... 38
Write Protect (WP#) ................................................................ 38
Persistent Protection Bit Lock .............................................. 38
High Voltage Sector Protection .............................................. 39
Figure 1. In-System Sector Protection/
Sector Unprotection Algorithms ...................................................... 40
Temporary Sector Unprotect .................................................. 41
Figure 2. Temporary Sector Unprotect Operation........................... 41
SecSi™ (Secured Silicon) Sector
Flash Memory Region ............................................................ 41
Factory-Locked Area (64 words) ......................................... 41
Customer-Lockable Area (64 words) ................................... 41
Figure 3. PDL127/9H SecSi Sector Protection Algorithm ............... 42
SecSi Sector Protection Bits ................................................ 42
Hardware Data Protection ...................................................... 43
Low VCC Write Inhibit ......................................................... 43
Capacitance (f= 1MHz, TA = 25×C) ....................................... 61
DC and Operating Characteristics .......................................... 61
Test Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Figure 10. Test Setup, VIO = 2.7 – 3.1 V...................................... 62
Figure 11. Input Waveforms and Measurement Levels ................. 62
6
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
Hardware Reset (RESET#) .................................................... 63
Hardware Data Protection ...................................................... 90
Low VCC Write Inhibit ......................................................... 91
Write Pulse “Glitch” Protection ............................................ 91
Logical Inhibit ....................................................................... 91
Power-Up Write Inhibit ......................................................... 91
Common Flash Memory Interface (CFI) . . . . . . . 91
Command Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Reading Array Data ................................................................ 94
Reset Command ..................................................................... 95
Autoselect Command Sequence ............................................ 95
Enter SecSi Sector/Exit SecSi Sector Command Sequence .. 95
Word Program Command Sequence ...................................... 95
Unlock Bypass Command Sequence .................................. 96
Write Buffer Programming ................................................... 96
Accelerated Program ........................................................... 97
Figure 4. Write Buffer Programming Operation.............................. 98
Figure 5. Program Operation ......................................................... 99
Program Suspend/Program Resume Command Sequence ... 99
Figure 6. Program Suspend/Program Resume............................ 100
Chip Erase Command Sequence ......................................... 100
Sector Erase Command Sequence ......................................100
Figure 7. Erase Operation............................................................ 101
Erase Suspend/Erase Resume Commands .........................101
Command Definitions ........................................................... 102
Write Operation Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
DQ7: Data# Polling ...............................................................103
Figure 8. Data# Polling Algorithm ................................................ 103
RY/BY#: Ready/Busy# .......................................................... 104
DQ6: Toggle Bit I ..................................................................104
Figure 9. Toggle Bit Algorithm...................................................... 105
DQ2: Toggle Bit II ................................................................. 105
Reading Toggle Bits DQ6/DQ2 .............................................105
DQ5: Exceeded Timing Limits .............................................. 106
DQ3: Sector Erase Timer ..................................................... 106
Figure 12. Reset Timings................................................................ 63
Erase and Program Operations .............................................. 64
Figure 13. Program Operation Timings........................................... 65
Figure 14. Accelerated Program Timing Diagram........................... 65
Figure 15. Chip/Sector Erase Operation Timings ........................... 66
Figure 16. Back-to-back Read/Write Cycle Timings ....................... 67
Figure 17. Data# Polling Timings (During Embedded Algorithms).. 67
Figure 18. Toggle Bit Timings (During Embedded Algorithms)....... 68
Figure 19. DQ2 vs. DQ6.................................................................. 68
Temporary Sector Unprotect .................................................. 69
Figure 20. Temporary Sector Unprotect Timing Diagram ............... 69
Figure 21. Sector/Sector Block Protect and
Unprotect Timing Diagram .............................................................. 70
Alternate CE#f1 Controlled Erase and Program Operations .. 71
Figure 22. Flash Alternate CE#f1 Controlled Write (Erase/Program)
Operation Timings........................................................................... 72
PSRAM AC Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
CE#s Timing ........................................................................... 73
Figure 23. Timing Diagram for Alternating
Between Pseudo SRAM to Flash.................................................... 73
Figure 24. Timing Waveform of Power-up ...................................... 73
pSRAM AC CHaracteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Functional Description ............................................................ 74
Absolute Maximum Ratings .................................................... 74
Figure 25. Standby Mode State Machines...................................... 75
Standby Mode Characteristic ................................................. 75
AC Characteristics (VCC= 2.7-3.1 V, TA= -40 to 85×C) ......... 75
Timing Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Figure 26. Timing Waveform of Read Cycle 1 ................................ 76
Figure 27. Timing Waveform of Read Cycle 2 ................................ 76
Figure 28. Timing Waveform of Write Cycle 1 ................................ 77
Figure 29. Timing Waveform of Write Cycle 2 ................................ 77
Figure 30. Timing Waveform of Write Cycle 3 ................................ 78
Erase And Programming Performance . . . . . . . . 79
Latchup Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Package Pin Capacitance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Flash Data Retention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Device Bus Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Table 1. Device Bus Operations .....................................................81
Requirements for Reading Array Data ................................... 81
Page Mode Read ................................................................ 82
Writing Commands/Command Sequences ............................ 82
Write Buffer ......................................................................... 82
Accelerated Program Operation .......................................... 82
Autoselect Functions ........................................................... 82
Standby Mode ........................................................................ 82
Automatic Sleep Mode ........................................................... 82
RESET#: Hardware Reset Pin ............................................... 83
Output Disable Mode .............................................................. 83
Table 2. Sector Address Table ........................................................84
Sector Group Protection and Unprotection ............................. 87
Table 3. Sector Group Protection/Unprotection Address Table .....87
Write Protect (WP#) ................................................................ 88
DQ1: Write-to-Buffer Abort ...................................................106
Table 10. Write Operation Status ................................................. 106
Figure 10. Maximum Negative Overshoot Waveform ................. 107
Figure 11. Maximum Positive Overshoot Waveform................... 107
DC Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Test Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Figure 12. Test Setup.................................................................. 109
Table 11. Test Specifications ....................................................... 109
Key to Switching Waveforms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Figure 13. Input Waveforms and
Measurement Levels.................................................................... 109
AC Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Read-Only Operations .........................................................110
Figure 14. Read Operation Timings............................................. 110
Figure 15. Page Read Timings .................................................... 111
Hardware Reset (RESET#) .................................................. 112
Figure 16. Reset Timings............................................................. 112
Erase and Program Operations ............................................113
Figure 17. Program Operation Timings........................................ 114
Figure 18. Accelerated Program Timing Diagram........................ 114
Figure 19. Chip/Sector Erase Operation Timings ........................ 115
Figure 20. Data# Polling Timings (During Embedded Algorithms) 116
Figure 21. Toggle Bit Timings (During Embedded Algorithms).... 117
Figure 22. DQ2 vs. DQ6............................................................... 117
Temporary Sector Unprotect ................................................ 118
Figure 23. Temporary Sector Group Unprotect Timing Diagram . 118
Temporary Sector Group Unprotect ....................................... 88
Figure 1. Temporary Sector Group Unprotect Operation................ 88
Figure 2. In-System Sector Group Protect/Unprotect Algorithms ... 89
SecSi (Secured Silicon) Sector Flash Memory Region .......... 90
Table 4. SecSi Sector Contents ......................................................90
Figure 3. SecSi Sector Protect Verify.............................................. 90
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
7
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
Figure 24. Sector Group Protect and Unprotect Timing Diagram . 119
Alternate CE# Controlled Erase and Program Operations ... 120
Figure 25. Alternate CE# Controlled Write (Erase/Program)
Operation Timings......................................................................... 121
Erase And Programming Performance . . . . . . . 122
Package Pin Capacitance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
FUA093—93-Ball Fine-Pitch Grid Array 13 x 9 mm package 124
Revision Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Latchup Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
8
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
PRODUCT SELECTOR GUIDE
Part Number
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
Flash Memory
(Data Storage)
Speed
Option
Standard Voltage Range:
VCC = 2.7–3.1 V
Flash Memory (XIP)
Pseudo SRAM
66
65
25
65
25
85
85
30
85
30
66
70
85
66
110
30
85
110
30
Max Access Time, ns
Page Access Time, ns
CE#f1 Access, ns
OE# Access, ns
70
N/A
70
N/A
70
110
30
110
30
35
35
MCP BLOCK DIAGRAM
VCC
f
VSS
(A22) A21 to A0
A21 to A0
(A22 PDL127 only)
RY/BY#
128 MBit
Flash Memory
(XIP)
Am29PDL127H/
Am29PDL129H
WP#/ACC
RESET#
CE#f1
DQ15 to DQ0
CE#f2
DQ15 to DQ0
(PDL129 only)
VCCps
VSS
A21 to A0
64 MBit
Pseudo
SRAM
LB#s
UB#s
WE#
DQ15 to DQ0
OE#
CE1#ps
CE2ps
VCCQds
VSS
RY/BY#ds
A21 to A0
64 MBit
Flash Memory
(Data Storage)
Am29LV640MH
WP#/ACCds
RESET#ds
CE#1ds
DQ15 to DQ0
VCCQds
VSS
RY/BY#ds
A21 to A0
64 MBit
Flash Memory
(Data Storage)
Am29LV640MH
DQ15 to DQ0
CE#2ds
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
9
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
CONNECTION DIAGRAM–PDL129H
93-Ball FBGA
Top View
A1
A10
NC
NC
B2
NC
C2
NC
D2
A3
B9
RY/BY#ds
C9
B1
B3
B4
B5
CE#f2
C5
B6
B7
B8
B10
V
ds
RESET#ds NC
V
SS
ds
NC
NC
NC
CC
Flash 1 Only
RAM Only
C1
C3
A7
C4
C6
C7
C8
NC
LB# WP#/ACC WE#
A8
A11
CE#1ds
D9
D3
A6
D4
D5
D6
D7
A19
E7
A9
D8
A12
E8
A13
F8
UB# RESET# CE2ps
A15
E5
E2
A2
E3
A5
E4
E6
E9
MirrorBit Only
A18 RY/BY# A20
A21
F5
NC
F6
NC
F1
NC
G1
NC
F2
A1
F3
A4
F4
A17
G4
F7
F9
F10
Flash Shared Only
A10
G7
DQ6
H7
A14
G8
NC
NC
NC
G5
NC
G6
NC
G2
A0
G3
G9 G10
V
SS
DQ1
H4
A16
NC
H2
CE#f1
J2
H3
OE#
J3
H5
DQ3
J5
H6
DQ4
J6
H8
H9
DQ9
J4
DQ13 DQ15
V
f
CC
J7
DQ12
K7
J8
DQ7
K8
J9
V
CC
f
V
CC
ps
CE#1ps DQ0
DQ10
K4
V
SS
K3
K2
K5
K6
K9
DQ8
NC
DQ2
DQ11 V Qds DQ5
DQ14
L8
WP#/ACCds
CC
L5
L6
L1
NC
M1
NC
L7
L9
L10
L2
L3
L4
V
Qf
CE#2ds
CC
NC
NC
NC
NC
M10
NC
NC
NC
V
ds
SS
integrity may be compromised if the package body is
exposed to temperatures above 150°C for prolonged
periods of time.
Special Package Handling Instructions
Special handling is required for Flash Memory products
in molded packages (BGA). The package and/or data
10
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
CONNECTION DIAGRAM–PDL127H
93-Ball FBGA
Top View
A1
A10
NC
NC
B2
NC
C2
NC
D2
A3
B9
RY/BY#ds
C9
B1
B3
B4
B5
NC
C5
B6
B7
B8
B10
V
ds
RESET#ds NC
V ds
SS
NC
NC
NC
CC
Flash 1 Only
RAM Only
C1
C3
A7
C4
C6
C7
C8
NC
LB# WP#/ACC WE#
A8
A11
CE#1ds
D9
D3
A6
D4
D5
D6
D7
A19
E7
A9
D8
A12
E8
A13
F8
UB# RESET# CE2ps
A15
E5
E2
A2
E3
A5
E4
E6
E9
MirrorBit Only
A18 RY/BY# A20
A21
F5
NC
F6
NC
F1
NC
G1
NC
F2
A1
F3
A4
F4
A17
G4
F7
F9
F10
A10
G7
DQ6
H7
A14
G8
NC
A22
NC
G5
NC
G6
NC
G2
A0
G3
G9 G10
V
SS
DQ1
H4
A16
NC
H2
CE#f1
J2
H3
OE#
J3
H5
DQ3
J5
H6
DQ4
J6
H8
H9
DQ9
J4
DQ13 DQ15
V
f
CC
J7
DQ12
K7
J8
DQ7
K8
J9
V
CC
f
V
CC
ps
CE#1ps DQ0
DQ10
K4
V
SS
K3
K2
K5
K6
K9
DQ8
NC
DQ2
DQ11 V Qds DQ5
DQ14
L8
WP#/ACCds
CC
L5
L6
L1
NC
M1
NC
L7
L9
L10
L2
L3
L4
V
Qf
CE#2ds
CC
NC
NC
NC
NC
M10
NC
NC
NC
V
ds
SS
data integrity may be compromised if the package body
is exposed to temperatures above 150°C for prolonged
periods of time.
Special Package Handling Instructions
Special handling is required for Flash Memory prod-
ucts in molded packages (BGA). The package and/or
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
11
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
NC
= Pin Not Connected Internally
PIN DESCRIPTION
A21–A0
= 22 Address Inputs (Common)
CE#1ds
= Chip Enable 1 (Am29LV640MH
Flash- Data Storage)
A22
=
Address Input (PDL127 only)
(Flash)
CE#2ds
= Chip Enable 2 (Am29LV640MH
Flash- Data Storage)
DQ15–DQ0
CE#f1
= 16 Data Inputs/Outputs (Common)
= Chip Enable 1 (Flash)
= Chip Enable 2 (Flash)
(PDL129 Only)
RY/BY#
= READY/BUSY Output (Data Stor-
age)
CE#f2
RESET#ds
= Hardware Reset Pin, Active Low
(Data Storage)
CE#1ps
CE2ps
OE#
= Chip Enable 1 (pSRAM)
= Chip Enable 2 (pSRAM)
= Output Enable (Common)
= Write Enable (Common)
WP#/ACCds = Write Protect/Acceleration Input
(Data Storage)
LOGIC SYMBOL
22
WE#
A21–A0
RY/BY#
= Ready/Busy Output and open drain.
When RY/BY# = VIH, the device is
ready to accept read operations and
commands. When RY/BY# = VOL,
the device is either executing an em-
bedded algorithm or the device is
executing a hardware reset opera-
tion.
A22 (PDL127 Only)
16
CE#f1
DQ15–DQ0
CE#f2 (PDL129 Only)
CE#1ps
UB#s
= Upper Byte Control (pSRAM)
= Lower Byte Control (pSRAM)
= Hardware Reset Pin, Active Low
CE2ps
RY/BY#
LB#s
OE#
RESET#
WP#/ACC
WE#
= Write Protect/Acceleration Input.
When WP/ACC#= VIL, the highest
and lowest two 4K-word sectors are
write protected regardless of other
sector protection configurations.
When WP/ACC#= VIH, these sector
are unprotected unless the DYB or
PPB is programmed. When
WP#/ACC
RESET#
UB#s
LB#s
WP/ACC#= 12V, program and erase
operations are accelerated.
CE#1ds
CE#2ds
VCC
f
= Flash 3.0 volt-only single power sup-
ply (see Product Selector Guide for
speed options and voltage supply
tolerances)
RY/BY#ds
RESET#ds
WP#/ACCds
VCC
VSS
ds
s
= pSRAM Power Supply
= Device Ground (Common)
= Data Storage
12
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
ORDERING INFORMATION
The order number (Valid Combination) is formed by the following:
Am70PDL12 66
7
C
D
H
I
T
TAPE AND REEL
T
S
=
=
7 inches
13 inches
TEMPERATURE RANGE
Industrial (–40°C to +85°C)
I
=
SPEED OPTION
See “Product Selector Guide” on page 9.
PROCESS TECHNOLOGY
H
=
0.13 µm (Am29PDL127H and Am29PDL129H)
128 Mb DATA STORAGE
(2 x Am29LV640M)
PSEUDO SRAM DEVICE DENSITY
C
=
64 Mbits
CONTROL PINS
7
9
=
=
1 CE Flash
2 CE Flash
AMD DEVICE NUMBER/DESCRIPTION
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
Stacked Multi-Chip Package (MCP) Flash Memory and pSRAM
128 Megabit (8 M x 16-Bit) CMOS 3.0 Volt-only, Simultaneous Operation Flash Memory and 64 Mbit
(4 M x 16-Bit) Pseudo Static RAM, and 128 Mbit data storage.
Valid Combinations
Valid Combinations
Valid Combinations list configurations planned to be supported in vol-
ume for this device. Consult the local AMD sales office to confirm
availability of specific valid combinations and to check on newly re-
leased combinations.
Order Number
Am70PDL127CDH66I
Am70PDL127CDH85I
Am70PDL129CDH66I
Am70PDL129CDH85I
Package Marking
M700000004
M700000005
M700000006
M700000007
T, S
T, S
T, S
T, S
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
13
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
needed to execute the command. The contents of the
MCP DEVICE BUS OPERATIONS
register serve as inputs to the internal state machine.
The state machine outputs dictate the function of the
device. Tables 1-2 lists the device bus operations, the
inputs and control levels they require, and the resulting
output. The following subsections describe each of
these operations in further detail.
This section describes the requirements and use of
the device bus operations, which are initiated through
the internal command register. The command register
itself does not occupy any addressable memory loca-
tion. The register is a latch used to store the com-
mands, along with the address and data information
14
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
Table 1. Device Bus Operations
CE#f2
LB#s UB#s
(Note (Note RESET#
WP#/
ACC
(Note 4)
Operation
(Notes 1, 2)
CE#f1
Active
DQ7– DQ15–
(PDL129 CE#1ps CE2ps OE# WE#
only)
Addr.
DQ0
DQ8
3)
3)
(Note 7)
(Note 8)
(Note 7)
(Note 8)
H
H
H
H
H
L
Read from
Active Flash
AIN
AIN
DOUT
DOUT
L (H)
L (H)
H (L)
H (L)
L
H
L
X
X
H
H
L/H
H
L
Write to Active
Flash
DIN
DIN
H
X
X
(Note 4)
VCC
0.3 V
VCC 0.3 V
VCC 0.3 V
Standby
H
H
H
L
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
H
H
High-Z High-Z
High-Z High-Z
VCC
Deep Power-down
Standby
0.3 V
H
H
H
H
X
X
X
X
X
X
Output Disable (Note 9)
L (H)
H (L)
L
H
H
L
L/H
L/H
High-Z High-Z
High-Z High-Z
(Note 7)
H
H
H
H
L
Flash Hardware
Reset
X
X
X
X
X
X
(Note 8)
(Note 7)
H
SADD,
A6 = L,
A1 = H,
A0 = L
Sector Protect
(Notes 6, 10)
VID
DIN
L (H)
L (H)
H (L)
H (L)
H
L
X
X
L/H
X
(Note 9)
(Note 7)
(Note 8)
H
H
H
L
H
L
SADD,
A6 = H,
A1 = H,
A0 = L
Sector
Unprotect
(Notes 5, 9)
VID
DIN
H
X
L
L
X
H
X
X
X
X
(Note 6)
(Note 6)
X
X
Temporary
Sector
Unprotect
(Note 7)
(Note 8)
H
H
H
L
VID
DIN
X
X
High-Z
DOUT
DOUT
DOUT
L
H
L
L
L
AIN
Read from pSRAM
Write to pSRAM
H
H
H
H
L
L
H
H
H
H
High-Z
DOUT
DIN
H
L
High-Z
DIN
L
AIN
DIN
X
L
H
L
L
X
High-Z
DIN
H
High-Z
Legend: L = Logic Low = VIL, H = Logic High = VIH, VID = 11.5–12.5 V, VHH = 9.0 0.5 V, X = Don’t Care, SADD = Flash Sector Address, AIN
=
Address In, DIN = Data In, DOUT = Data Out
Notes:
1. Other operations except for those indicated in this column are
6. If WP#/ACC = VIL, the two outermost boot sectors remain
protected. If WP#/ACC = VIH, the two outermost boot sector
protection depends on whether they were last protected or
inhibited.
2. Do not apply CE#f1 or 2 = VIL, CE#1ps = VIL and CE2ps = VIH at
the same time.
unprotected using the method described in “Sector/Sector Block
Protection and Unprotection”. If WP#/ACC = VHH, all sectors will
be unprotected.
3. Don’t care or open LB#s or UB#s.
4. If WP#/ACC = VIL, the boot sectors will be protected. If WP#/ACC
= VIH the boot sectors protection will be removed.
If WP#/ACC = VACC (9V), the program time will be reduced by
40%.
7. Data will be retained in pSRAM.
8. Data will be lost in pSRAM.
9. Both CE#f1 inputs may be held low for this operation.
5. The sector protect and sector unprotect functions may also be
implemented via programming equipment. See the “Sector/Sector
Block Protection and Unprotection” section.
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
15
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
A22–A3 (A21–A3 for PDL129) constant and changing
A2 to A0 to select the specific word within that page.
Requirements for Reading Array Data
To read array data from the outputs, the system must
drive the OE# and appropriate CE#f1/CE#f2 (PDL129
only) pins to VIL. CE#f1 and CE#f2 are the power con-
trol. OE# is the output control and gates array data to
the output pins. WE# should remain at VIH.
Table 2. Page Select
Word
A2
0
A1
0
A0
0
The internal state machine is set for reading array data
upon device power-up, or after a hardware reset. This
ensures that no spurious alteration of the memory
content occurs during the power transition. No com-
mand is necessary in this mode to obtain array data.
Standard microprocessor read cycles that assert valid
addresses on the device address inputs produce valid
data on the device data outputs. Each bank remains
enabled for read access until the command register
contents are altered.
Word 0
Word 1
Word 2
Word 3
Word 4
Word 5
Word 6
Word 7
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
Refer to the Flash AC Characteristics table for timing
specifications and to Figure 12 for the timing diagram.
ICC1 in the DC Characteristics table represents the ac-
tive current specification for reading array data.
1
1
1
Simultaneous Operation
In addition to the conventional features (read, pro-
gram, erase-suspend read, and erase-suspend pro-
gram), the device is capable of reading data from one
bank of memory while a program or erase operation is
in progress in another bank of memory (simultaneous
operation), The bank can be selected by bank ad-
dresses (A22–A20) (A21–A20 for PDL129) with zero
latency.
Random Read (Non-Page Read)
Address access time (tACC) is equal to the delay from
stable addresses to valid output data. The chip enable
access time (tCE) is the delay from the stable ad-
dresses and stable CE#f1 to valid data at the output
inputs. The output enable access time is the delay
from the falling edge of the OE# to valid data at the
output inputs (assuming the addresses have been sta-
ble for at least tACC–tOE time).
The simultaneous operation can execute multi-func-
tion mode in the same bank.
Page Mode Read
Table 3. Bank Select (PDL129H)
The device is capable of fast page mode read and is
compatible with the page mode Mask ROM read oper-
ation. This mode provides faster read access speed
for random locations within a page. Address bits
A22–A3 (A21–A3 for PDL129) select an 8-word page,
and address bits A2–A0 select a specific word within
that page. This is an asynchronous operation with the
microprocessor supplying the specific word location.
Bank
CE#f1
CE#f2
A21–A20
00, 01, 10
11
Bank 1A
Bank 1B
Bank 2A
Bank 2B
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
00
01, 10, 11
The random or initial page access is tACC or tCE and
subsequent page read accesses (as long as the loca-
tions specified by the microprocessor fall within that
page) are tPACC. When CE#f1 and CE#f2 (PDL129
only) are deasserted (CE#f1=CE#f2=VIH), the reasser-
tion of CE#f1 or CE#f2 (PDL129 only) for subsequent
access has access time of tACC or tCE. Here again,
CE#f1/CE#f2 (PDL129 only) selects the device and
OE# is the output control and should be used to gate
data to the output inputs if the device is selected. Fast
page mode accesses are obtained by keeping
Table 4. Bank Select (PDL127H)
Bank
A22–A20
000
Bank A
Bank B
Bank C
Bank D
001, 010, 011
100, 101, 110
111
16
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
Autoselect Functions
Writing Commands/Command Sequences
If the system writes the autoselect command se-
quence, the device enters the autoselect mode. The
system can then read autoselect codes from the inter-
nal register (which is separate from the memory array)
on DQ15–DQ0. Standard read cycle timings apply in
this mode. Refer to the Autoselect Command Se-
quence sections for more information.
To write a command or command sequence (which in-
cludes programming data to the device and erasing
sectors of memory), the system must drive WE# and
CE#f1 or CE#f2 (PDL 129 only) to VIL, and OE# to VIH.
The device features an Unlock Bypass mode to facili-
tate faster programming. Once a bank enters the Un-
lock Bypass mode, only two write cycles are required
to program a word, instead of four. The “Word Pro-
gram Command Sequence” section has details on
programming data to the device using both standard
and Unlock Bypass command sequences.
Standby Mode
When the system is not reading or writing to the de-
vice, it can place the device in the standby mode. In
this mode, current consumption is greatly reduced,
and the outputs are placed in the high impedance
state, independent of the OE# input.
An erase operation can erase one sector, multiple sec-
tors, or the entire device. Table 4 indicates the address
space that each sector occupies. A “bank address” is
the address bits required to uniquely select a bank.
Similarly, a “sector address” refers to the address bits
required to uniquely select a sector. The “Command
Definitions” section has details on erasing a sector or
the entire chip, or suspending/resuming the erase op-
eration.
The device enters the CMOS standby mode when the
CE#f1, CE#f2 (PDL129 only) and RESET# pins are all
held at VIO 0.3 V. (Note that this is a more restricted
voltage range than VIH.) If CE#f1, CE#f2 (PDL129
only), and RESET# are held at VIH, but not within VCC
0.3 V, the device will be in the standby mode, but the
standby current will be greater. The device requires
standard access time (tCE) for read access when the
device is in either of these standby modes, before it is
ready to read data.
ICC2 in the DC Characteristics table represents the ac-
tive current specification for the write mode. The Flash
AC Characteristics section contains timing specifica-
tion tables and timing diagrams for write operations.
If the device is deselected during erasure or program-
ming, the device draws active current until the
operation is completed.
Accelerated Program Operation
The device offers accelerated program operations
through the ACC function. This function is primarily in-
tended to allow faster manufacturing throughput at the
factory.
ICC3 in the DC Characteristics table represents the
CMOS standby current specification.
Automatic Sleep Mode
The automatic sleep mode minimizes Flash device en-
ergy consumption. The device automatically enables
If the system asserts VHH on this pin, the device auto-
matically enters the aforementioned Unlock Bypass
mode, temporarily unprotects any protected sectors,
and uses the higher voltage on the pin to reduce the
time required for program operations. The system
would use a two-cycle program command sequence
as required by the Unlock Bypass mode. Removing
VHH from the WP#/ACC pin returns the device to nor-
mal operation. Note that VHH must not be asserted on
WP#/ACC for operations other than accelerated pro-
gramming, or device damage may result. In addition,
the WP#/ACC pin should be raised to VCC when not in
use. That is, the WP#/ACC pin should not be left float-
ing or unconnected; inconsistent behavior of the de-
vice may result.
this mode when addresses remain stable for tACC
+
150 ns. The automatic sleep mode is independent of
the CE#f1/CE#f2 (PDL129 only), WE#, and OE# con-
trol signals. Standard address access timings provide
new data when addresses are changed. While in
sleep mode, output data is latched and always avail-
able to the system. Note that during automatic sleep
mode, OE# must be at VIH before the device reduces
current to the stated sleep mode specification. ICC5 in
the DC Characteristics table represents the automatic
sleep mode current specification.
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
17
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
internal reset operation is complete, which requires a
RESET#: Hardware Reset Pin
time of tREADY (during Embedded Algorithms). The sys-
tem can thus monitor RY/BY# to determine whether
the reset operation is complete. If RESET# is asserted
when a program or erase operation is not executing
(RY/BY# pin is “1”), the reset operation is completed
within a time of tREADY (not during Embedded Algo-
rithms). The system can read data tRH after the RE-
SET# pin returns to VIH.
The RESET# pin provides a hardware method of re-
setting the device to reading array data. When the RE-
SET# pin is driven low for at least a period of tRP, the
device immediately terminates any operation in
progress, tristates all output pins, and ignores all
read/write commands for the duration of the RESET#
pulse. The device also resets the internal state ma-
chine to reading array data. The operation that was in-
terrupted should be reinitiated once the device is
ready to accept another command sequence, to en-
sure data integrity.
Refer to the pSRAM AC Characteristics tables for RE-
SET# parameters and to Figure 11 for the timing dia-
gram.
Current is reduced for the duration of the RESET#
pulse. When RESET# is held at VSS 0.3 V, the device
draws CMOS standby current (ICC4). If RESET# is
held at VIL but not within VSS 0.3 V, the standby cur-
rent will be greater.
Output Disable Mode
When the OE# input is at VIH, output from the device is
disabled. The output pins (except for RY/BY#) are
placed in the highest Impedance state
Table 5. SecSiTM Sector Addresses
The RESET# pin may be tied to the system reset cir-
cuitry. A system reset would thus also reset the Flash
memory, enabling the system to read the boot-up firm-
ware from the Flash memory.
Sector Size
Address Range
Am29PDL127H/
Am29PDL129H
128 words
000000h–00007Fh
Factory-Locked Area
64 words
64 words
000000h-00003Fh
000040h-00007Fh
If RESET# is asserted during a program or erase op-
eration, the RY/BY# pin remains a “0” (busy) until the
Customer-Lockable Area
18
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
Table 6. Am29PDL127H Sector Architecture
Bank
Sector
SA0
Sector Address (A22-A12)
00000000000
00000000001
00000000010
00000000011
00000000100
00000000101
00000000110
00000000111
00000001XXX
00000010XXX
00000011XXX
00000100XXX
00000101XXX
00000110XXX
00000111XXX
00001000XXX
00001001XXX
00001010XXX
00001011XXX
00001100XXX
00001101XXX
00001110XXX
00001111XXX
00010000XXX
00010001XXX
00010010XXX
00010011XXX
00010100XXX
00010101XXX
00010110XXX
00010111XXX
00011000XXX
00011001XXX
00011010XXX
00011011XXX
00011100XXX
00011101XXX
00011110XXX
00011111XXX
Sector Size (Kwords)
Address Range (x16)
000000h–000FFFh
001000h–001FFFh
002000h–002FFFh
003000h–003FFFh
004000h–004FFFh
005000h–005FFFh
006000h–006FFFh
007000h–007FFFh
008000h–00FFFFh
010000h–017FFFh
018000h–01FFFFh
020000h–027FFFh
028000h–02FFFFh
030000h–037FFFh
038000h–03FFFFh
040000h–047FFFh
048000h–04FFFFh
050000h–057FFFh
058000h–05FFFFh
060000h–067FFFh
068000h–06FFFFh
070000h–077FFFh
078000h–07FFFFh
080000h–087FFFh
088000h–08FFFFh
090000h–097FFFh
098000h–09FFFFh
0A0000h–0A7FFFh
0A8000h–0AFFFFh
0B0000h–0B7FFFh
0B8000h–0BFFFFh
0C0000h–0C7FFFh
0C8000h–0CFFFFh
0D0000h–0D7FFFh
0D8000h–0DFFFFh
0E0000h–0E7FFFh
0E8000h–0EFFFFh
0F0000h–0F7FFFh
0F8000h–0FFFFFh
4
SA1
4
SA2
4
SA3
4
SA4
4
SA5
4
SA6
4
SA7
4
SA8
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
SA9
SA10
SA11
SA12
SA13
SA14
SA15
SA16
SA17
SA18
SA19
SA20
SA21
SA22
SA23
SA24
SA25
SA26
SA27
SA28
SA29
SA30
SA31
SA32
SA33
SA34
SA35
SA36
SA37
SA38
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
19
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
Table 6. Am29PDL127H Sector Architecture (Continued)
Bank
Sector
SA39
SA40
SA41
SA42
SA43
SA44
SA45
SA46
SA47
SA48
SA49
SA50
SA51
SA52
SA53
SA54
SA55
SA56
SA57
SA58
SA59
SA60
SA61
SA62
SA63
SA64
SA65
SA66
SA67
SA68
SA69
SA70
SA71
SA72
SA73
SA74
SA75
SA76
SA77
SA78
Sector Address (A22-A12)
00100000XXX
00100001XXX
00100010XXX
00100011XXX
00100100XXX
00100101XXX
00100110XXX
00100111XXX
00101000XXX
00101001XXX
00101010XXX
00101011XXX
00101100XXX
00101101XXX
00101110XXX
00101111XXX
00110000XXX
00110001XXX
00110010XXX
00110011XXX
00110100XXX
00110101XXX
00110110XXX
00110111XXX
00111000XXX
00111001XXX
00111010XXX
00111011XXX
00111100XXX
00111101XXX
00111110XXX
00111111XXX
01000000XXX
01000001XXX
01000010XXX
01000011XXX
01000100XXX
01000101XXX
01000110XXX
01000111XXX
Sector Size (Kwords)
Address Range (x16)
100000h–107FFFh
108000h–10FFFFh
110000h–117FFFh
118000h–11FFFFh
120000h–127FFFh
128000h–12FFFFh
130000h–137FFFh
138000h–13FFFFh
140000h–147FFFh
148000h–14FFFFh
150000h–157FFFh
158000h–15FFFFh
160000h–167FFFh
168000h–16FFFFh
170000h–177FFFh
178000h–17FFFFh
180000h–187FFFh
188000h–18FFFFh
190000h–197FFFh
198000h–19FFFFh
1A0000h–1A7FFFh
1A8000h–1AFFFFh
1B0000h–1B7FFFh
1B8000h–1BFFFFh
1C0000h–1C7FFFh
1C8000h–1CFFFFh
1D0000h–1D7FFFh
1D8000h–1DFFFFh
1E0000h–1E7FFFh
1E8000h–1EFFFFh
1F0000h–1F7FFFh
1F8000h–1FFFFFh
200000h–207FFFh
208000h–20FFFFh
210000h–217FFFh
218000h–21FFFFh
220000h–227FFFh
228000h–22FFFFh
230000h–237FFFh
238000h–23FFFFh
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
20
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
Table 6. Am29PDL127H Sector Architecture (Continued)
Bank
Sector
SA79
Sector Address (A22-A12)
01001000XXX
01001001XXX
01001010XXX
01001011XXX
01001100XXX
01001101XXX
01001110XXX
01001111XXX
01010000XXX
01010001XXX
01010010XXX
01010011XXX
01010100XXX
01010101XXX
01010110XXX
01010111XXX
01011000XXX
01011001XXX
01011010XXX
01011011XXX
01011100XXX
01011101XXX
01011110XXX
01011111XXX
01100000XXX
01100001XXX
01100010XXX
01100011XXX
01100100XXX
01100101XXX
01100110XXX
01100111XXX
01101000XXX
01101001XXX
01101010XXX
01101011XXX
01101100XXX
01101101XXX
01101110XXX
01101111XXX
Sector Size (Kwords)
Address Range (x16)
240000h–247FFFh
248000h–24FFFFh
250000h–257FFFh
258000h–25FFFFh
260000h–267FFFh
268000h–26FFFFh
270000h–277FFFh
278000h–27FFFFh
280000h–287FFFh
288000h–28FFFFh
290000h–297FFFh
298000h–29FFFFh
2A0000h–2A7FFFh
2A8000h–2AFFFFh
2B0000h–2B7FFFh
2B8000h–2BFFFFh
2C0000h–2C7FFFh
2C8000h–2CFFFFh
2D0000h–2D7FFFh
2D8000h–2DFFFFh
2E0000h–2E7FFFh
2E8000h–2EFFFFh
2F0000h–2F7FFFh
2F8000h–2FFFFFh
300000h–307FFFh
308000h–30FFFFh
310000h–317FFFh
318000h–31FFFFh
320000h–327FFFh
328000h–32FFFFh
330000h–337FFFh
338000h–33FFFFh
340000h–347FFFh
348000h–34FFFFh
350000h–357FFFh
358000h–35FFFFh
360000h–367FFFh
368000h–36FFFFh
370000h–377FFFh
378000h–37FFFFh
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
SA80
SA81
SA82
SA83
SA84
SA85
SA86
SA87
SA88
SA89
SA90
SA91
SA92
SA93
SA94
SA95
SA96
SA97
SA98
SA99
SA100
SA101
SA102
SA103
SA104
SA105
SA106
SA107
SA108
SA109
SA110
SA111
SA112
SA113
SA114
SA115
SA116
SA117
SA118
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
21
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
Table 6. Am29PDL127H Sector Architecture (Continued)
Bank
Sector
SA119
SA120
SA121
SA122
SA123
SA124
SA125
SA126
SA127
SA128
SA129
SA130
SA131
SA132
SA133
SA134
SA135
SA136
SA137
SA138
SA139
SA140
SA141
SA142
SA143
SA144
SA145
SA146
SA147
SA148
SA149
SA150
SA151
SA152
SA153
SA154
SA155
SA156
SA157
SA158
Sector Address (A22-A12)
01110000XXX
01110001XXX
01110010XXX
01110011XXX
01110100XXX
01110101XXX
01110110XXX
01110111XXX
01111000XXX
01111001XXX
01111010XXX
01111011XXX
01111100XXX
01111101XXX
01111110XXX
01111111XXX
10000000XXX
10000001XXX
10000010XXX
10000011XXX
10000100XXX
10000101XXX
10000110XXX
10000111XXX
10001000XXX
10001001XXX
10001010XXX
10001011XXX
10001100XXX
10001101XXX
10001110XXX
10001111XXX
10010000XXX
10010001XXX
10010010XXX
10010011XXX
10010100XXX
10010101XXX
10010110XXX
10010111XXX
Sector Size (Kwords)
Address Range (x16)
380000h–387FFFh
388000h–38FFFFh
390000h–397FFFh
398000h–39FFFFh
3A0000h–3A7FFFh
3A8000h–3AFFFFh
3B0000h–3B7FFFh
3B8000h–3BFFFFh
3C0000h–3C7FFFh
3C8000h–3CFFFFh
3D0000h–3D7FFFh
3D8000h–3DFFFFh
3E0000h–3E7FFFh
3E8000h–3EFFFFh
3F0000h–3F7FFFh
3F8000h–3FFFFFh
400000h–407FFFh
408000h–40FFFFh
410000h–417FFFh
418000h–41FFFFh
420000h–427FFFh
428000h–42FFFFh
430000h–437FFFh
438000h–43FFFFh
440000h–447FFFh
448000h–44FFFFh
450000h–457FFFh
458000h–45FFFFh
460000h–467FFFh
468000h–46FFFFh
470000h–477FFFh
478000h–47FFFFh
480000h–487FFFh
488000h–48FFFFh
490000h–497FFFh
498000h–49FFFFh
4A0000h–4A7FFFh
4A8000h–4AFFFFh
4B0000h–4B7FFFh
4B8000h–4BFFFFh
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
22
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
Table 6. Am29PDL127H Sector Architecture (Continued)
Bank
Sector
SA159
SA160
SA161
SA162
SA163
SA164
SA165
SA166
SA167
SA168
SA169
SA170
SA171
SA172
SA173
SA174
SA175
SA176
SA177
SA178
SA179
SA180
SA181
SA182
SA183
SA184
SA185
SA186
SA187
SA188
SA189
SA190
SA191
SA192
SA193
SA194
SA195
SA196
SA197
SA198
Sector Address (A22-A12)
10011000XXX
10011001XXX
10011010XXX
10011011XXX
10011100XXX
10011101XXX
10011110XXX
10011111XXX
10100000XXX
10100001XXX
10100010XXX
10100011XXX
10100100XXX
10100101XXX
10100110XXX
10100111XXX
10101000XXX
10101001XXX
10101010XXX
10101011XXX
10101100XXX
10101101XXX
10101110XXX
10101111XXX
10110000XXX
10110001XXX
10110010XXX
10110011XXX
10110100XXX
10110101XXX
10110110XXX
10110111XXX
10111000XXX
10111001XXX
10111010XXX
10111011XXX
10111100XXX
10111101XXX
10111110XXX
10111111XXX
Sector Size (Kwords)
Address Range (x16)
4C0000h–4C7FFFh
4C8000h–4CFFFFh
4D0000h–4D7FFFh
4D8000h–4DFFFFh
4E0000h–4E7FFFh
4E8000h–4EFFFFh
4F0000h–4F7FFFh
4F8000h–4FFFFFh
500000h–507FFFh
508000h–50FFFFh
510000h–517FFFh
518000h–51FFFFh
520000h–527FFFh
528000h–52FFFFh
530000h–537FFFh
538000h–53FFFFh
540000h–547FFFh
548000h–54FFFFh
550000h–557FFFh
558000h–15FFFFh
560000h–567FFFh
568000h–56FFFFh
570000h–577FFFh
578000h–57FFFFh
580000h–587FFFh
588000h–58FFFFh
590000h–597FFFh
598000h–59FFFFh
5A0000h–5A7FFFh
5A8000h–5AFFFFh
5B0000h–5B7FFFh
5B8000h–5BFFFFh
5C0000h–5C7FFFh
5C8000h–5CFFFFh
5D0000h–5D7FFFh
5D8000h–5DFFFFh
5E0000h–5E7FFFh
5E8000h–5EFFFFh
5F0000h–5F7FFFh
5F8000h–5FFFFFh
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
23
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
Table 6. Am29PDL127H Sector Architecture (Continued)
Bank
Sector
SA199
SA200
SA201
SA202
SA203
SA204
SA205
SA206
SA207
SA208
SA209
SA210
SA211
SA212
SA213
SA214
SA215
SA216
SA217
SA218
SA219
SA220
SA221
SA222
SA223
SA224
SA225
SA226
SA227
SA228
SA229
SA230
Sector Address (A22-A12)
11000000XXX
11000001XXX
11000010XXX
11000011XXX
11000100XXX
11000101XXX
11000110XXX
11000111XXX
11001000XXX
11001001XXX
11001010XXX
11001011XXX
11001100XXX
11001101XXX
11001110XXX
11001111XXX
11010000XXX
11010001XXX
11010010XXX
11010011XXX
11010100XXX
11010101XXX
11010110XXX
11010111XXX
11011000XXX
11011001XXX
11011010XXX
11011011XXX
11011100XXX
11011101XXX
11011110XXX
11011111XXX
Sector Size (Kwords)
Address Range (x16)
600000h–607FFFh
608000h–60FFFFh
610000h–617FFFh
618000h–61FFFFh
620000h–627FFFh
628000h–62FFFFh
630000h–637FFFh
638000h–63FFFFh
640000h–647FFFh
648000h–64FFFFh
650000h–657FFFh
658000h–65FFFFh
660000h–667FFFh
668000h–66FFFFh
670000h–677FFFh
678000h–67FFFFh
680000h–687FFFh
688000h–68FFFFh
690000h–697FFFh
698000h–69FFFFh
6A0000h–6A7FFFh
6A8000h–6AFFFFh
6B0000h–6B7FFFh
6B8000h–6BFFFFh
6C0000h–6C7FFFh
6C8000h–6CFFFFh
6D0000h–6D7FFFh
6D8000h–6DFFFFh
6E0000h–6E7FFFh
6E8000h–6EFFFFh
6F0000h–6F7FFFh
6F8000h–6FFFFFh
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
24
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
Table 6. Am29PDL127H Sector Architecture (Continued)
Bank
Sector
SA231
SA232
SA233
SA234
SA235
SA236
SA237
SA238
SA239
SA240
SA241
SA242
SA243
SA244
SA245
SA246
SA247
SA248
SA249
SA250
SA251
SA252
SA253
SA254
SA255
SA256
SA257
SA258
SA259
SA260
SA261
SA262
SA263
SA264
SA265
SA266
SA267
SA268
SA269
Sector Address (A22-A12)
11100000XXX
11100001XXX
11100010XXX
11100011XXX
11100100XXX
11100101XXX
11100110XXX
11100111XXX
11101000XXX
11101001XXX
11101010XXX
11101011XXX
11101100XXX
11101101XXX
11101110XXX
11101111XXX
11110000XXX
11110001XXX
11110010XXX
11110011XXX
11110100XXX
11110101XXX
11110110XXX
11110111XXX
11111000XXX
11111001XXX
11111010XXX
11111011XXX
11111100XXX
11111101XXX
11111110XXX
11111111000
11111111001
11111111010
11111111011
11111111100
11111111101
11111111110
11111111111
Sector Size (Kwords)
Address Range (x16)
700000h–707FFFh
708000h–70FFFFh
710000h–717FFFh
718000h–71FFFFh
720000h–727FFFh
728000h–72FFFFh
730000h–737FFFh
738000h–73FFFFh
740000h–747FFFh
748000h–74FFFFh
750000h–757FFFh
758000h–75FFFFh
760000h–767FFFh
768000h–76FFFFh
770000h–777FFFh
778000h–77FFFFh
780000h–787FFFh
788000h–78FFFFh
790000h–797FFFh
798000h–79FFFFh
7A0000h–7A7FFFh
7A8000h–7AFFFFh
7B0000h–7B7FFFh
7B8000h–7BFFFFh
7C0000h–7C7FFFh
7C8000h–7CFFFFh
7D0000h–7D7FFFh
7D8000h–7DFFFFh
7E0000h–7E7FFFh
7E8000h–7EFFFFh
7F0000h–7F7FFFh
7F8000h–7F8FFFh
7F9000h–7F9FFFh
7FA000h–7FAFFFh
7FB000h–7FBFFFh
7FC000h–7FCFFFh
7FD000h–7FDFFFh
7FE000h–7FEFFFh
7FF000h–7FFFFFh
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
25
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
Table 7. Am29PDL129H Sector Architecture
Sector Address
(A21-A12)
Sector Size
Bank
Sector
CE#f1
CE#f2
Address Range (x16)
(Kwords)
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
SA1-0
SA1-1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0000000XXX
0000001XXX
0000010XXX
0000011XXX
0000100XXX
0000101XXX
0000110XXX
0000111XXX
0001000XXX
0001001XXX
0001010XXX
0001011XXX
0001100XXX
0001101XXX
0001110XXX
0001111XXX
0010000XXX
0010001XXX
0010010XXX
0010011XXX
0010100XXX
0010101XXX
0010110XXX
0010111XXX
0011000XXX
0011001XXX
0011010XXX
0011011XXX
0011100XXX
0011101XXX
0011110XXX
0011111XXX
0100000XXX
0100001XXX
0100010XXX
0100011XXX
0100100XXX
0100101XXX
000000h–007FFFh
008000h–00FFFFh
010000h–017FFFh
018000h–01FFFFh
020000h–027FFFh
028000h–02FFFFh
030000h–037FFFh
038000h–03FFFFh
040000h–047FFFh
048000h–04FFFFh
050000h–057FFFh
058000h–05FFFFh
060000h–067FFFh
068000h–06FFFFh
070000h–077FFFh
078000h–07FFFFh
080000h–087FFFh
088000h–08FFFFh
090000h–097FFFh
098000h–09FFFFh
0A0000h–0A7FFFh
0A8000h–0AFFFFh
0B0000h–0B7FFFh
0B8000h–0BFFFFh
0C0000h–0C7FFFh
0C8000h–0CFFFFh
0D0000h–0D7FFFh
0D8000h–0DFFFFh
0E0000h–0E7FFFh
0E8000h–0EFFFFh
0F0000h–0F7FFFh
0F8000h–0FFFFFh
100000h–107FFFh
108000h–10FFFFh
110000h–117FFFh
118000h–11FFFFh
120000h–127FFFh
128000h–12FFFFh
SA1-2
SA1-3
SA1-4
SA1-5
SA1-6
SA1-7
SA1-8
SA1-9
SA1-10
SA1-11
SA1-12
SA1-13
SA1-14
SA1-15
SA1-16
SA1-17
SA1-18
SA1-19
SA1-20
SA1-21
SA1-22
SA1-23
SA1-24
SA1-25
SA1-26
SA1-27
SA1-28
SA1-29
SA1-30
SA1-31
SA1-32
SA1-33
SA1-34
SA1-35
SA1-36
SA1-37
26
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
Table 7. Am29PDL129H Sector Architecture (Continued)
Sector Address
(A21-A12)
Sector Size
Bank
Sector
CE#f1
CE#f2
Address Range (x16)
(Kwords)
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
SA1-38
SA1-39
SA1-40
SA1-41
SA1-42
SA1-43
SA1-44
SA1-45
SA1-46
SA1-47
SA1-48
SA1-49
SA1-50
SA1-51
SA1-52
SA1-53
SA1-54
SA1-55
SA1-56
SA1-57
SA1-58
SA1-59
SA1-60
SA1-61
SA1-62
SA1-63
SA1-64
SA1-65
SA1-66
SA1-67
SA1-68
SA1-69
SA1-70
SA1-71
SA1-72
SA1-73
SA1-74
SA1-75
SA1-76
SA1-77
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0100110XXX
0100111XXX
0101000XXX
0101001XXX
0101010XXX
0101011XXX
0101100XXX
0101101XXX
0101110XXX
0101111XXX
0110000XXX
0110001XXX
0110010XXX
0110011XXX
0110100XXX
0110101XXX
0110110XXX
0110111XXX
0111000XXX
0111001XXX
0111010XXX
0111011XXX
0111100XXX
0111101XXX
0111110XXX
0111111XXX
1000000XXX
1000001XXX
1000010XXX
1000011XXX
1000100XXX
1000101XXX
1000110XXX
1000111XXX
1001000XXX
1001001XXX
1001010XXX
1001011XXX
1001100XXX
1001101XXX
130000h–137FFFh
138000h–13FFFFh
140000h–147FFFh
148000h–14FFFFh
150000h–157FFFh
158000h–15FFFFh
160000h–167FFFh
168000h–16FFFFh
170000h–177FFFh
178000h–17FFFFh
180000h–187FFFh
188000h–18FFFFh
190000h–197FFFh
198000h–19FFFFh
1A0000h–1A7FFFh
1A8000h–1AFFFFh
1B0000h–1B7FFFh
1B8000h–1BFFFFh
1C0000h–1C7FFFh
1C8000h–1CFFFFh
1D0000h–1D7FFFh
1D8000h–1DFFFFh
1E0000h–1E7FFFh
1E8000h–1EFFFFh
1F0000h–1F7FFFh
1F8000h–1FFFFFh
200000h–207FFFh
208000h–20FFFFh
210000h–217FFFh
218000h–21FFFFh
220000h–227FFFh
228000h–22FFFFh
230000h–237FFFh
238000h–23FFFFh
240000h–247FFFh
248000h–24FFFFh
250000h–257FFFh
258000h–25FFFFh
260000h–267FFFh
268000h–26FFFFh
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
27
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
Table 7. Am29PDL129H Sector Architecture (Continued)
Sector Address
(A21-A12)
Sector Size
(Kwords)
Bank
Sector
CE#f1
CE#f2
Address Range (x16)
SA1-78
SA1-79
SA1-80
SA1-81
SA1-82
SA1-83
SA1-84
SA1-85
SA1-86
SA1-87
SA1-88
SA1-89
SA1-90
SA1-91
SA1-92
SA1-93
SA1-94
SA1-95
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1001110XXX
1001111XXX
1010000XXX
1010001XXX
1010010XXX
1010011XXX
1010100XXX
1010101XXX
1010110XXX
1010111XXX
1011000XXX
1011001XXX
1011010XXX
1011011XXX
1011100XXX
1011101XXX
1011110XXX
1011111XXX
32
270000h–277FFFh
278000h–27FFFFh
280000h–287FFFh
288000h–28FFFFh
290000h–297FFFh
298000h–29FFFFh
2A0000h–2A7FFFh
2A8000h–2AFFFFh
2B0000h–2B7FFFh
2B8000h–2BFFFFh
2C0000h–2C7FFFh
2C8000h–2CFFFFh
2D0000h–2D7FFFh
2D8000h–2DFFFFh
2E0000h–2E7FFFh
2E8000h–2EFFFFh
2F0000h–2F7FFFh
2F8000h–2FFFFFh
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
28
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
Table 7. Am29PDL129H Sector Architecture (Continued)
Sector Address
(A21-A12)
Sector Size
Bank
Sector
CE#f1
CE#f2
Address Range (x16)
(Kwords)
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
4
SA1-96
SA1-97
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1100000XXX
1100001XXX
1100010XXX
1100011XXX
1100100XXX
1100101XXX
1100110XXX
1100111XXX
1101000XXX
1101001XXX
1101010XXX
1101011XXX
1101100XXX
1101101XXX
1101110XXX
1101111XXX
1110000XXX
1110001XXX
1110010XXX
1110011XXX
1110100XXX
1110101XXX
1110110XXX
1110111XXX
1111000XXX
1111001XXX
1111010XXX
1111011XXX
1111100XXX
1111101XXX
1111110XXX
1111111000
1111111001
1111111010
1111111011
1111111100
1111111101
1111111110
1111111111
300000h–307FFFh
308000h–30FFFFh
310000h–317FFFh
318000h–31FFFFh
320000h–327FFFh
328000h–32FFFFh
330000h–337FFFh
338000h–33FFFFh
340000h–347FFFh
348000h–34FFFFh
350000h–357FFFh
358000h–35FFFFh
360000h–367FFFh
368000h–36FFFFh
370000h–377FFFh
378000h–37FFFFh
380000h–387FFFh
388000h–38FFFFh
390000h–397FFFh
398000h–39FFFFh
3A0000h–3A7FFFh
3A8000h–3AFFFFh
3B0000h–3B7FFFh
3B8000h–3BFFFFh
3C0000h–3C7FFFh
3C8000h–3CFFFFh
3D0000h–3D7FFFh
3D8000h–3DFFFFh
3E0000h–3E7FFFh
3E8000h–3EFFFFh
3F0000h–3F7FFFh
3F8000h–3F8FFFh
3F9000h–3F9FFFh
3FA000h–3FAFFFh
3FB000h–3FBFFFh
3FC000h–3FCFFFh
3FD000h–3FDFFFh
3FE000h–3FEFFFh
3FF000h–3FFFFFh
SA1-98
SA1-99
SA1-100
SA1-101
SA1-102
SA1-103
SA1-104
SA1-105
SA1-106
SA1-107
SA1-108
SA1-109
SA1-110
SA1-111
SA1-112
SA1-113
SA1-114
SA1-115
SA1-116
SA1-117
SA1-118
SA1-119
SA1-120
SA1-121
SA1-122
SA1-123
SA1-124
SA1-125
SA1-126
SA1-127
SA1-128
SA1-129
SA1-130
SA1-131
SA1-132
SA1-133
SA1-134
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
29
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
Table 7. Am29PDL129H Sector Architecture (Continued)
Sector Address
(A21-A12)
Sector Size
(Kwords)
Bank
Sector
CE#f1
CE#f2
Address Range (x16)
SA2-0
SA2-1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0000000000
0000000001
0000000010
0000000011
0000000100
0000000101
0000000110
0000000111
0000001XXX
0000010XXX
0000011XXX
0000100XXX
0000101XXX
0000110XXX
0000111XXX
0001000XXX
0001001XXX
0001010XXX
0001011XXX
0001100XXX
0001101XXX
0001110XXX
0001111XXX
0010000XXX
0010001XXX
0010010XXX
0010011XXX
0010100XXX
0010101XXX
0010110XXX
0010111XXX
0011000XXX
0011001XXX
0011010XXX
0011011XXX
0011100XXX
0011101XXX
0011110XXX
0011111XXX
4
000000h–000FFFh
001000h–001FFFh
002000h–002FFFh
003000h–003FFFh
004000h–004FFFh
005000h–005FFFh
006000h–006FFFh
007000h–007FFFh
008000h–00FFFFh
010000h–017FFFh
018000h–01FFFFh
020000h–027FFFh
028000h–02FFFFh
030000h–037FFFh
038000h–03FFFFh
040000h–047FFFh
048000h–04FFFFh
050000h–057FFFh
058000h–05FFFFh
060000h–067FFFh
068000h–06FFFFh
070000h–077FFFh
078000h–07FFFFh
080000h–087FFFh
088000h–08FFFFh
090000h–097FFFh
098000h–09FFFFh
0A0000h–0A7FFFh
0A8000h–0AFFFFh
0B0000h–0B7FFFh
0B8000h–0BFFFFh
0C0000h–0C7FFFh
0C8000h–0CFFFFh
0D0000h–0D7FFFh
0D8000h–0DFFFFh
0E0000h–0E7FFFh
0E8000h–0EFFFFh
0F0000h–0F7FFFh
0F8000h–0FFFFFh
4
SA2-2
4
SA2-3
4
SA2-4
4
SA2-5
4
SA2-6
4
SA2-7
4
SA2-8
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
SA2-9
SA2-10
SA2-11
SA2-12
SA2-13
SA2-14
SA2-15
SA2-16
SA2-17
SA2-18
SA2-19
SA2-20
SA2-21
SA2-22
SA2-23
SA2-24
SA2-25
SA2-26
SA2-27
SA2-28
SA2-29
SA2-30
SA2-31
SA2-32
SA2-33
SA2-34
SA2-35
SA2-36
SA2-37
SA2-38
30
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
Table 7. Am29PDL129H Sector Architecture (Continued)
Sector Address
(A21-A12)
Sector Size
Bank
Sector
CE#f1
CE#f2
Address Range (x16)
(Kwords)
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
SA2-39
SA2-40
SA2-41
SA2-42
SA2-43
SA2-44
SA2-45
SA2-46
SA2-47
SA2-48
SA2-49
SA2-50
SA2-51
SA2-52
SA2-53
SA2-54
SA2-55
SA2-56
SA2-57
SA2-58
SA2-59
SA2-60
SA2-61
SA2-62
SA2-63
SA2-64
SA2-65
SA2-66
SA2-67
SA2-68
SA2-69
SA2-70
SA2-71
SA2-72
SA2-73
SA2-74
SA2-75
SA2-76
SA2-77
SA2-78
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0100000XXX
0100001XXX
0100010XXX
0100011XXX
0100100XXX
0100101XXX
0100110XXX
0100111XXX
0101000XXX
0101001XXX
0101010XXX
0101011XXX
0101100XXX
0101101XXX
0101110XXX
0101111XXX
0110000XXX
0110001XXX
0110010XXX
0110011XXX
0110100XXX
0110101XXX
0110110XXX
0110111XXX
0111000XXX
0111001XXX
0111010XXX
0111011XXX
0111100XXX
0111101XXX
0111110XXX
0111111XXX
1000000XXX
1000001XXX
1000010XXX
1000011XXX
1000100XXX
1000101XXX
1000110XXX
1000111XXX
100000h–107FFFh
108000h–10FFFFh
110000h–117FFFh
118000h–11FFFFh
120000h–127FFFh
128000h–12FFFFh
130000h–137FFFh
138000h–13FFFFh
140000h–147FFFh
148000h–14FFFFh
150000h–157FFFh
158000h–15FFFFh
160000h–167FFFh
168000h–16FFFFh
170000h–177FFFh
178000h–17FFFFh
180000h–187FFFh
188000h–18FFFFh
190000h–197FFFh
198000h–19FFFFh
1A0000h–1A7FFFh
1A8000h–1AFFFFh
1B0000h–1B7FFFh
1B8000h–1BFFFFh
1C0000h–1C7FFFh
1C8000h–1CFFFFh
1D0000h–1D7FFFh
1D8000h–1DFFFFh
1E0000h–1E7FFFh
1E8000h–1EFFFFh
1F0000h–1F7FFFh
1F8000h–1FFFFFh
200000h–207FFFh
208000h–20FFFFh
210000h–217FFFh
218000h–21FFFFh
220000h–227FFFh
228000h–22FFFFh
230000h–237FFFh
238000h–23FFFFh
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
31
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
Table 7. Am29PDL129H Sector Architecture (Continued)
Sector Address
(A21-A12)
Sector Size
Bank
Sector
CE#f1
CE#f2
Address Range (x16)
(Kwords)
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
SA2-79
SA2-80
SA2-81
SA2-82
SA2-83
SA2-84
SA2-85
SA2-86
SA2-87
SA2-88
SA2-89
SA2-90
SA2-91
SA2-92
SA2-93
SA2-94
SA2-95
SA2-96
SA2-97
SA2-98
SA2-99
SA2-100
SA2-101
SA2-102
SA2-103
SA2-104
SA2-105
SA2-106
SA2-107
SA2-108
SA2-109
SA2-110
SA2-111
SA2-112
SA2-113
SA2-114
SA2-115
SA2-116
SA2-117
SA2-118
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1001000XXX
1001001XXX
1001010XXX
1001011XXX
1001100XXX
1001101XXX
1001110XXX
1001111XXX
1010000XXX
1010001XXX
1010010XXX
1010011XXX
1010100XXX
1010101XXX
1010110XXX
1010111XXX
1011000XXX
1011001XXX
1011010XXX
1011011XXX
1011100XXX
1011101XXX
1011110XXX
1011111XXX
1100000XXX
1100001XXX
1100010XXX
1100011XXX
1100100XXX
1100101XXX
1100110XXX
1100111XXX
1101000XXX
1101001XXX
1101010XXX
1101011XXX
1101100XXX
1101101XXX
1101110XXX
1101111XXX
240000h–247FFFh
248000h–24FFFFh
250000h–257FFFh
258000h–25FFFFh
260000h–267FFFh
268000h–26FFFFh
270000h–277FFFh
278000h–27FFFFh
280000h–287FFFh
288000h–28FFFFh
290000h–297FFFh
298000h–29FFFFh
2A0000h–2A7FFFh
2A8000h–2AFFFFh
2B0000h–2B7FFFh
2B8000h–2BFFFFh
2C0000h–2C7FFFh
2C8000h–2CFFFFh
2D0000h–2D7FFFh
2D8000h–2DFFFFh
2E0000h–2E7FFFh
2E8000h–2EFFFFh
2F0000h–2F7FFFh
2F8000h–2FFFFFh
300000h–307FFFh
308000h–30FFFFh
310000h–317FFFh
318000h–31FFFFh
320000h–327FFFh
328000h–32FFFFh
330000h–337FFFh
338000h–33FFFFh
340000h–347FFFh
348000h–34FFFFh
350000h–357FFFh
358000h–35FFFFh
360000h–367FFFh
368000h–36FFFFh
370000h–377FFFh
378000h–37FFFFh
32
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
Table 7. Am29PDL129H Sector Architecture (Continued)
Sector Address
(A21-A12)
Sector Size
(Kwords)
Bank
Sector
CE#f1
CE#f2
Address Range (x16)
SA2-119
SA2-120
SA2-121
SA2-122
SA2-123
SA2-124
SA2-125
SA2-126
SA2-127
SA2-128
SA2-129
SA2-130
SA2-131
SA2-132
SA2-133
SA2-134
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1110000XXX
1110001XXX
1110010XXX
1110011XXX
1110100XXX
1110101XXX
1110110XXX
1110111XXX
1111000XXX
1111001XXX
1111010XXX
1111011XXX
1111100XXX
1111101XXX
1111110XXX
1111111XXX
32
380000h–387FFFh
388000h–38FFFFh
390000h–397FFFh
398000h–39FFFFh
3A0000h–3A7FFFh
3A8000h–3AFFFFh
3B0000h–3B7FFFh
3B8000h–3BFFFFh
3C0000h–3C7FFFh
3C8000h–3CFFFFh
3D0000h–3D7FFFh
3D8000h–3DFFFFh
3E0000h–3E7FFFh
3E8000h–3EFFFFh
3F0000h–3F7FFFh
3F8000h–3FFFFFh
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
33
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
Table 8. Am29PDL127H Boot Sector/Sector Block
Sector/
Sector Block Size
Sector
A22-A12
Addresses for Protection/Unprotection
SA131-SA134
SA135-SA138
SA139-SA142
SA143-SA146
SA147-SA150
SA151-SA154
SA155-SA158
SA159-SA162
SA163-SA166
SA167-SA170
SA171-SA174
SA175-SA178
SA179-SA182
SA183-SA186
SA187-SA190
SA191-SA194
SA195-SA198
SA199-SA202
SA203-SA206
SA207-SA210
SA211-SA214
SA215-SA218
SA219-SA222
SA223-SA226
SA227-SA230
SA231-SA234
SA235-SA238
SA239-SA242
SA243-SA246
SA247-SA250
SA251-SA254
SA255-SA258
SA259
011111XXXXX
100000XXXXX
100001XXXXX
100010XXXXX
100011XXXXX
100100XXXXX
100101XXXXX
100110XXXXX
100111XXXXX
101000XXXXX
101001XXXXX
101010XXXXX
101011XXXXX
101100XXXXX
101101XXXXX
101110XXXXX
101111XXXXX
110000XXXXX
110001XXXXX
110010XXXXX
110011XXXXX
110100XXXXX
110101XXXXX
110110XXXXX
110111XXXXX
111000XXXXX
111001XXXXX
111010XXXXX
111011XXXXX
111100XXXXX
111101XXXXX
111110XXXXX
11111100XXX
11111101XXX
11111110XXX
11111111000
11111111001
11111111010
11111111011
11111111100
11111111101
11111111110
11111111111
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
32 Kwords
Sector/
Sector Block Size
Sector
A22-A12
SA0
00000000000
00000000001
00000000010
00000000011
00000000100
00000000101
00000000110
00000000111
00000001XXX
00000010XXX
00000011XXX
000001XXXXX
000010XXXXX
000011XXXXX
000100XXXXX
000101XXXXX
000110XXXXX
000111XXXXX
001000XXXXX
001001XXXXX
001010XXXXX
001011XXXXX
001100XXXXX
001101XXXXX
001110XXXXX
001111XXXXX
010000XXXXX
010001XXXXX
010010XXXXX
010011XXXXX
010100XXXXX
010101XXXXX
010110XXXXX
010111XXXXX
011000XXXXX
011001XXXXX
011010XXXXX
011011XXXXX
011100XXXXX
011101XXXXX
011110XXXXX
4 Kwords
SA1
4 Kwords
SA2
4 Kwords
SA3
4 Kwords
SA4
4 Kwords
SA5
4 Kwords
SA6
4 Kwords
SA7
4 Kwords
SA8
32 Kwords
SA9
32 Kwords
SA10
32 Kwords
SA11-SA14
SA15-SA18
SA19-SA22
SA23-SA26
SA27-SA30
SA31-SA34
SA35-SA38
SA39-SA42
SA43-SA46
SA47-SA50
SA51-SA54
SA55-SA58
SA59-SA62
SA63-SA66
SA67-SA70
SA71-SA74
SA75-SA78
SA79-SA82
SA83-SA86
SA87-SA90
SA91-SA94
SA95-SA98
SA99-SA102
SA103-SA106
SA107-SA110
SA111-SA114
SA115-SA118
SA119-SA122
SA123-SA126
SA127-SA130
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
SA260
32 Kwords
SA261
32 Kwords
SA262
4 Kwords
SA263
4 Kwords
SA264
4 Kwords
SA265
4 Kwords
SA266
4 Kwords
SA267
4 Kwords
SA268
4 Kwords
SA269
4 Kwords
34
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
Table 9. Am29PDL129H Boot Sector/Sector Block
Table 10. Am29PDL129H Boot Sector/Sector
Block Addresses for Protection/Unprotection
CE#f2 Control
Addresses for Protection/Unprotection
CE#f1 Control
Sector
Group
Sector/Sector
Block Size
Sector
Group
A21-12
Sector/Sector
Block Size
A21-12
SA1-0–SA1-3
SA1-4–SA1-7
SA1-8–SA1-11
SA1-12–SA1-15
SA1-16–SA1-19
SA1-20–SA1-23
SA1-24–SA1-27
SA1-28–SA1-31
SA1-32–SA1-35
SA1-36–SA1-39
SA1-40–SA1-43
SA1-44–SA1-47
SA1-48–SA1-51
SA1-52–SA1-55
SA1-56–SA1-59
SA1-60–SA1-63
SA1-64–SA1-67
SA1-68–SA1-71
SA1-72–SA1-75
SA1-76–SA1-79
SA1-80–SA1-83
SA1-84–SA1-87
SA1-88–SA1-91
SA1-92–SA1-95
SA1-96–SA1-99
SA1-100–SA1-103
SA1-104–SA1-107
SA1-108–SA1-111
SA1-112–SA1-115
SA1-116–SA1-119
SA1-120–SA1-123
SA1-124
00000XXXXX
00001XXXXX
00010XXXXX
00011XXXXX
00100XXXXX
00101XXXXX
00110XXXXX
00111XXXXX
01000XXXXX
01001XXXXX
01010XXXXX
01011XXXXX
01100XXXXX
01101XXXXX
01110XXXXX
01111XXXXX
10000XXXXX
10001XXXXX
10010XXXXX
10011XXXXX
10100XXXXX
10101XXXXX
10110XXXXX
10111XXXXX
11000XXXXX
11001XXXXX
11010XXXXX
11011XXXXX
11100XXXXX
11101XXXXX
11110XXXXX
1111100XXX
1111101XXX
1111110XXX
1111111000
1111111001
1111111010
1111111011
1111111100
1111111101
1111111110
1111111111
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
32 Kwords
SA2-0
0000000000
0000000001
0000000010
0000000011
0000000100
0000000101
0000000110
0000000111
0000001XXX
0000010XXX
0000011XXX
00001XXXXX
00010XXXXX
00011XXXXX
00100XXXXX
00101XXXXX
00110XXXXX
00111XXXXX
01000XXXXX
01001XXXXX
01010XXXXX
01011XXXXX
01100XXXXX
01101XXXXX
01110XXXXX
01111XXXXX
10000XXXXX
10001XXXXX
10010XXXXX
10011XXXXX
10100XXXXX
10101XXXXX
10110XXXXX
10111XXXXX
11000XXXXX
11001XXXXX
11010XXXXX
11011XXXXX
11100XXXXX
11101XXXXX
11110XXXXX
11111XXXXX
4 Kwords
SA2-1
4 Kwords
SA2-2
4 Kwords
SA2-3
4 Kwords
SA2-4
4 Kwords
SA2-5
4 Kwords
SA2-6
4 Kwords
SA2-7
4 Kwords
SA2-8
32 Kwords
SA2-9
32 Kwords
SA2-10
32 Kwords
SA2-11 - SA2-14
SA2-15 - SA2-18
SA2-19 - SA2-22
SA2-23 - SA2-26
SA2-27 - SA2-30
SA2-31 - SA2-34
SA2-35 - SA2-38
SA2-39 - SA2-42
SA2-43 - SA2-46
SA2-47 - SA2-50
SA2-51 - SA2-54
SA2-55 - SA2-58
SA2-59 - SA2-62
SA2-63 - SA2-66
SA2-67 - SA2-70
SA2-71 - SA2-74
SA2-75 - SA2-78
SA2-79 - SA2-82
SA2-83 - SA2-86
SA2-87 - SA2-90
SA2-91 - SA2-94
SA2-95 - SA2-98
SA2-99 - SA2-102
SA2-103 - SA2-106
SA2-107 - SA2-110
SA2-111 - SA2-114
SA2-115 - SA2-118
SA2-119 - SA2-122
SA2-123 - SA2-126
SA2-127 - SA2-130
SA2-131 - SA2-134
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
128 (4x32) Kwords
SA1-125
32 Kwords
SA1-126
32 Kwords
SA1-127
4 Kwords
SA1-128
4 Kwords
SA1-129
4 Kwords
SA1-130
4 Kwords
SA1-131
4 Kwords
SA1-132
4 Kwords
SA1-133
4 Kwords
SA1-134
4 Kwords
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
35
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
SECTOR PROTECTION
The Am29PDL127H/Am29PDL129H features several
levels of sector protection, which can disable both the
program and erase operations in certain sectors or
sector groups:
■ Dynamically Locked—The sector is protected and
can be changed by a simple command.
■ Unlocked—The sector is unprotected and can be
changed by a simple command.
Persistent Sector Protection
To achieve these states, three types of “bits” are used:
A command sector protection method that replaces
the old 12 V controlled protection method.
Persistent Protection Bit (PPB)
A single Persistent (non-volatile) Protection Bit is as-
signed to a maximum four sectors (see the sector ad-
dress tables for specific sector protection groupings).
All 4 Kword boot-block sectors have individual sector
Persistent Protection Bits (PPBs) for greater flexibility.
Each PPB is individually modifiable through the PPB
Write Command.
Password Sector Protection
A highly sophisticated protection method that requires
a password before changes to certain sectors or sec-
tor groups are permitted.
WP# Hardware Protection
A write protect pin that can prevent program or erase
operations in sectors 0, 1, 268, and 269 in PDL 127 or
in SA1-133, SA1-134, SA2-0, SA2-1 in PDL 129. The
WP# Hardware Protection feature is always available,
regardless of which of the other two methods are cho-
sen.
The device erases all PPBs in parallel. If any PPB re-
quires erasure, the device must be instructed to pre-
program all of the sector PPBs prior to PPB erasure.
Otherwise, a previously erased sector PPBs can po-
tentially be over-erased. The flash device does not
have a built-in means of preventing sector PPBs
over-erasure.
Selecting a Sector Protection Mode
The device defaults to the Persistent Sector Protection
mode. However, to prevents a program or virus from
later setting the Password Mode Locking Bit, which
would cause an unexpected shift from the default Per-
sistent Sector Protection Mode into the Password Pro-
tection Mode, it is recommended that either of two
one-time programmable non-volatile bits that perma-
nently define which sector protection method be set
before the device is first programmed. The Persis-
tent Sector Protection Mode Locking Bit perma-
nently sets the device to the Persistent Sector
Protection mode. The Password Mode Locking Bit
permanently sets the device to the Password Sector
Protection mode. It is not possible to switch between
the two protection modes once a locking bit has been
set.
Persistent Protection Bit Lock (PPB Lock)
The Persistent Protection Bit Lock (PPB Lock) is a glo-
bal volatile bit. When set to “1”, the PPBs cannot be
changed. When cleared (“0”), the PPBs are change-
able. There is only one PPB Lock bit per device. The
PPB Lock is cleared after power-up or hardware reset.
There is no command sequence to unlock the PPB
Lock.
Dynamic Protection Bit (DYB)
A volatile protection bit is assigned for each sector.
After power-up or hardware reset, the contents of all
DYBs is “0”. Each DYB is individually modifiable
through the DYB Write Command.
When the parts are first shipped, the PPBs are
cleared, the DYBs are cleared, and PPB Lock is de-
faulted to power up in the cleared state – meaning the
PPBs are changeable.
The device is shipped with all sectors unprotected.
AMD offers the option of programming and protecting
sectors at the factory prior to shipping the device
through AMD’s ExpressFlash™ Service. Contact an
AMD representative for details.
When the device is first powered on the DYBs power
up cleared (sectors not protected). The Protection
State for each sector is determined by the logical OR
of the PPB and the DYB related to that sector. For the
sectors that have the PPBs cleared, the DYBs control
whether or not the sector is protected or unprotected.
By issuing the DYB Write command sequences, the
DYBs will be set or cleared, thus placing each sector in
the protected or unprotected state. These are the
so-called Dynamic Locked or Unlocked states. They
are called dynamic states because it is very easy to
switch back and forth between the protected and un-
protected conditions. This allows software to easily
protect sectors against inadvertent changes yet does
It is possible to determine whether a sector is pro-
tected or unprotected. See Autoselect Command Se-
quence for details.
Persistent Sector Protection
The Persistent Sector Protection method replaces the
12 V controlled protection method in previous AMD
flash devices. This new method provides three differ-
ent sector protection states:
■ Persistently Locked—The sector is protected and
cannot be changed.
36
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
not prevent the easy removal of protection when
Table 11. Sector Protection Schemes
changes are needed. The DYBs maybe set or cleared
as often as needed.
PPB
DYB
PPB
Lock
Sector State
The PPBs allow for a more static, and difficult to
change, level of protection. The PPBs retain their state
across power cycles because they are non-volatile. In-
dividual PPBs are set with a command but must all be
cleared as a group through a complex sequence of
program and erasing commands. The PPBs are also
limited to 100 erase cycles.
Unprotected—PPB and DYB are
changeable
0
0
0
Unprotected—PPB not
changeable, DYB is changeable
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
Protected—PPB and DYB are
changeable
The PPB Lock bit adds an additional level of protec-
tion. Once all PPBs are programmed to the desired
settings, the PPB Lock may be set to “1”. Setting the
PPB Lock disables all program and erase commands
to the non-volatile PPBs. In effect, the PPB Lock Bit
locks the PPBs into their current state. The only way to
clear the PPB Lock is to go through a power cycle.
System boot code can determine if any changes to the
PPB are needed; for example, to allow new system
code to be downloaded. If no changes are needed
then the boot code can set the PPB Lock to disable
any further changes to the PPBs during system opera-
tion.
Protected—PPB not
changeable, DYB is changeable
Table 11 contains all possible combinations of the
DYB, PPB, and PPB lock relating to the status of the
sector.
In summary, if the PPB is set, and the PPB lock is set,
the sector is protected and the protection can not be
removed until the next power cycle clears the PPB
lock. If the PPB is cleared, the sector can be dynami-
cally locked or unlocked. The DYB then controls
whether or not the sector is protected or unprotected.
The WP#/ACC write protect pin adds a final level of
hardware protection to sectors 0, 1, 268, and 269 in
PDL 127 or in SA1-133, SA1-134, SA2-0, SA2-1 in
PDL 129. When this pin is low it is not possible to
change the contents of these sectors. These sectors
generally hold system boot code. The WP#/ACC pin
can prevent any changes to the boot code that could
override the choices made while setting up sector pro-
tection during system initialization.
If the user attempts to program or erase a protected
sector, the device ignores the command and returns to
read mode. A program command to a protected sector
enables status polling for approximately 1 µs before
the device returns to read mode without having modi-
fied the contents of the protected sector. An erase
command to a protected sector enables status polling
for approximately 50 µs after which the device returns
to read mode without having erased the protected sec-
tor.
It is possible to have sectors that have been persis-
tently locked, and sectors that are left in the dynamic
state. The sectors in the dynamic state are all unpro-
tected. If there is a need to protect some of them, a
simple DYB Write command sequence is all that is
necessary. The DYB write command for the dynamic
sectors switch the DYBs to signify protected and un-
protected, respectively. If there is a need to change the
status of the persistently locked sectors, a few more
steps are required. First, the PPB Lock bit must be dis-
abled by either putting the device through a power-cy-
cle, or hardware reset. The PPBs can then be
changed to reflect the desired settings. Setting the
PPB lock bit once again will lock the PPBs, and the de-
vice operates normally again.
The programming of the DYB, PPB, and PPB lock for a
given sector can be verified by writing a
DYB/PPB/PPB lock verify command to the device.
Persistent Sector Protection Mode Locking Bit
Like the password mode locking bit, a Persistent Sec-
tor Protection mode locking bit exists to guarantee that
the device remain in software sector protection. Once
set, the Persistent Sector Protection locking bit pre-
vents programming of the password protection mode
locking bit. This guarantees that a hacker could not
place the device in password protection mode.
The best protection is achieved by executing the PPB
lock bit set command early in the boot code, and pro-
tect the boot code by holding WP#/ACC = VIL.
Password Protection Mode
The Password Sector Protection Mode method allows
an even higher level of security than the Persistent
Sector Protection Mode. There are two main differ-
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
37
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
ences between the Persistent Sector Protection and
the Password Sector Protection Mode:
The Password Mode Locking Bit, once set, prevents
reading the 64-bit password on the DQ bus and further
password programming. The Password Mode Locking
Bit is not erasable. Once Password Mode Locking Bit
is programmed, the Persistent Sector Protection Lock-
ing Bit is disabled from programming, guaranteeing
that no changes to the protection scheme are allowed.
■ When the device is first powered on, or comes out
of a reset cycle, the PPB Lock bit set to the locked
state, rather than cleared to the unlocked state.
■ The only means to clear the PPB Lock bit is by writ-
ing a unique 64-bit Password to the device.
64-bit Password
The Password Sector Protection method is otherwise
identical to the Persistent Sector Protection method.
The 64-bit Password is located in its own memory
space and is accessible through the use of the Pass-
word Program and Verify commands (see “Password
Verify Command”). The password function works in
conjunction with the Password Mode Locking Bit,
which when set, prevents the Password Verify com-
mand from reading the contents of the password on
the pins of the device.
A 64-bit password is the only additional tool utilized in
this method.
Once the Password Mode Locking Bit is set, the pass-
word is permanently set with no means to read, pro-
gram, or erase it. The password is used to clear the
PPB Lock bit. The Password Unlock command must
be written to the flash, along with a password. The
flash device internally compares the given password
with the pre-programmed password. If they match, the
PPB Lock bit is cleared, and the PPBs can be altered.
If they do not match, the flash device does nothing.
There is a built-in 2 µs delay for each “password
check.” This delay is intended to thwart any efforts to
run a program that tries all possible combinations in
order to crack the password.
Write Protect (WP#)
The Write Protect feature provides a hardware method
of protecting sectors 0, 1, 268, and 269 in PDL 127 or
in SA1-133, SA1-134, SA2-0, SA2-1 in PDL 129 with-
out using VID. This function is provided by the WP# pin
and overrides the previously discussed High Voltage
Sector Protection method.
If the system asserts VIL on the WP#/ACC pin, the de-
vice disables program and erase functions in the two
outermost 4 Kword sectors on both ends of the flash
array independent of whether it was previously pro-
tected or unprotected.
Password and Password Mode Locking Bit
In order to select the Password sector protection
scheme, the customer must first program the pass-
word. The password may be correlated to the unique
Electronic Serial Number (ESN) of the particular flash
device. Each ESN is different for every flash device;
therefore each password should be different for every
flash device. While programming in the password re-
gion, the customer may perform Password Verify oper-
ations.
If the system asserts VIH on the WP#/ACC pin, the de-
vice reverts to whether sectors 0, 1, 268, and 269 in
PDL 127 or in SA1-133, SA1-134, SA2-0, SA2-1 in
PDL 129 were last set to be protected or unprotected.
That is, sector protection or unprotection for these sec-
tors depends on whether they were last protected or
unprotected using the method described in High Volt-
age Sector Protection.
Once the desired password is programmed in, the
customer must then set the Password Mode Locking
Bit. This operation achieves two objectives:
Note that the WP#/ACC pin must not be left floating or
unconnected; inconsistent behavior of the device may
result.
1. Permanently sets the device to operate using the
Password Protection Mode. It is not possible to re-
verse this function.
Persistent Protection Bit Lock
2. Disables all further commands to the password re-
gion. All program, and read operations are ignored.
The Persistent Protection Bit (PPB) Lock is a volatile
bit that reflects the state of the Password Mode Lock-
ing Bit after power-up reset. If the Password Mode
Lock Bit is also set after a hardware reset (RESET#
asserted) or a power-up reset, the ONLY means for
clearing the PPB Lock Bit in Password Protection
Mode is to issue the Password Unlock command. Suc-
cessful execution of the Password Unlock command
clears the PPB Lock Bit, allowing for sector PPBs
modifications. Asserting RESET#, taking the device
through a power-on reset, or issuing the PPB Lock Bit
Set command sets the PPB Lock Bit to a “1” when the
Password Mode Lock Bit is not set.
Both of these objectives are important, and if not care-
fully considered, may lead to unrecoverable errors.
The user must be sure that the Password Protection
method is desired when setting the Password Mode
Locking Bit. More importantly, the user must be sure
that the password is correct when the Password Mode
Locking Bit is set. Due to the fact that read operations
are disabled, there is no means to verify what the
password is afterwards. If the password is lost after
setting the Password Mode Locking Bit, there will be
no way to clear the PPB Lock bit.
38
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
If the Password Mode Locking Bit is not set, including
High Voltage Sector Protection
Persistent Protection Mode, the PPB Lock Bit is
cleared after power-up or hardware reset. The PPB
Lock Bit is set by issuing the PPB Lock Bit Set com-
mand. Once set the only means for clearing the PPB
Lock Bit is by issuing a hardware or power-up reset.
The Password Unlock command is ignored in Persis-
tent Protection Mode.
Sector protection and unprotection may also be imple-
mented using programming equipment. The proce-
dure requires high voltage (VID) to be placed on the
RESET# pin. Refer to Figure 1 for details on this pro-
cedure. Note that for sector unprotect, all unprotected
sectors must first be protected prior to the first sector
write cycle.
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
39
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
START
START
Protect all sectors:
PLSCNT = 1
PLSCNT = 1
The indicated portion
of the sector protect
algorithm must be
performed for all
unprotected sectors
prior to issuing the
first sector
RESET# = VID
RESET# = VID
Wait 4 µs
Wait 4 µs
unprotect address
No
No
First Write
Cycle = 60h?
First Write
Cycle = 60h?
Temporary Sector
Unprotect Mode
Temporary Sector
Unprotect Mode
Yes
Yes
Set up sector
address
No
All sectors
protected?
Sector Protect:
Write 60h to sector
address with
A7-A0 =
Yes
Set up first sector
address
00000010
Sector Unprotect:
Wait 100 µs
Write 60h to sector
address with
A7-A0 =
Verify Sector
Protect: Write 40h
to sector address
with A7-A0 =
01000010
Reset
PLSCNT = 1
Increment
PLSCNT
Wait 1.2 ms
00000010
Verify Sector
Unprotect: Write
40h to sector
address with
A7-A0 =
Read from
sector address
with A7-A0 =
00000010
Increment
PLSCNT
No
00000010
No
PLSCNT
= 25?
Read from
sector address
with A7-A0 =
00000010
Data = 01h?
Yes
No
Yes
Set up
next sector
address
Yes
Remove VID
from RESET#
No
PLSCNT
= 1000?
Protect another
sector?
Data = 00h?
Yes
No
Write reset
command
Yes
Remove VID
from RESET#
Remove VID
from RESET#
No
Last sector
verified?
Sector Protect
complete
Write reset
command
Yes
Write reset
command
Remove VID
from RESET#
Device failed
Sector Protect
complete
Sector Unprotect
complete
Write reset
command
Sector Protect
Algorithm
Device failed
Sector Unprotect
complete
Sector Unprotect
Algorithm
Figure 1. In-System Sector Protection/
Sector Unprotection Algorithms
40
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
indicator bits (DQ6, DQ7) to indicate the fac-
tory-locked and customer-locked status of the part.
Temporary Sector Unprotect
This feature allows temporary unprotection of previ-
ously protected sectors to change data in-system. The
Sector Unprotect mode is activated by setting the RE-
SET# pin to VID. During this mode, formerly protected
sectors can be programmed or erased by selecting the
sector addresses. Once VID is removed from the RE-
SET# pin, all the previously protected sectors are
protected again. Figure 2 shows the algorithm, and
Figure 19 shows the timing diagrams, for this feature.
While PPB lock is set, the device cannot enter the
Temporary Sector Unprotection Mode.
The system accesses the SecSi Sector through a
command sequence (see “Enter SecSi™ Sector/Exit
SecSi Sector Command Sequence”). After the system
has written the Enter SecSi Sector command se-
quence, it may read the SecSi Sector by using the ad-
dresses normally occupied by the boot sectors. This
mode of operation continues until the system issues
the Exit SecSi Sector command sequence, or until
power is removed from the device. On power-up, or
following a hardware reset, the device reverts to send-
ing commands to the normal address space.
Factory-Locked Area (64 words)
The factory-locked area of the SecSi Sector
(000000h-00003Fh) is locked when the part is
shipped, whether or not the area was programmed at
the factory. The SecSi Sector Factory-locked Indicator
Bit (DQ7) is permanently set to a “1”. AMD offers the
ExpressFlash service to program the factory-locked
area with a random ESN, a customer-defined code, or
any combination of the two. Because only AMD can
program and protect the factory-locked area, this
method ensures the security of the ESN once the
product is shipped to the field. Contact an AMD repre-
sentative for details on using AMD’s ExpressFlash ser-
vice. Note that the ACC function and unlock bypass
modes are not available when the SecSi Sector is en-
abled.
START
RESET# = VID
(Note 1)
Perform Erase or
Program Operations
RESET# = VIH
Temporary Sector
Unprotect Completed
(Note 2)
Customer-Lockable Area (64 words)
The customer-lockable area of the SecSi Sector
(000040h-00007Fh) is shipped unprotected, which al-
lows the customer to program and optionally lock the
area as appropriate for the application. The SecSi
Sector Customer-locked Indicator Bit (DQ6) is shipped
as “0” and can be permanently locked to “1” by issuing
the SecSi Protection Bit Program Command. The
SecSi Sector can be read any number of times, but
can be programmed and locked only once. Note that
the accelerated programming (ACC) and unlock by-
pass functions are not available when programming
the SecSi Sector.
Notes:
1. All protected sectors unprotected (If WP#/ACC = VIL,
sectors 0, 1, 268, 269 in PDL 127 or in SA1-133,
SA1-134, SA2-0, SA2-1 in PDL 129.will remain
protected).
2. All previously protected sectors are protected once
again.
Figure 2. Temporary Sector Unprotect Operation
SecSi™ (Secured Silicon) Sector
Flash Memory Region
The Customer-lockable SecSi Sector area can be pro-
tected using one of the following procedures:
The SecSi (Secured Silicon) Sector feature provides a
Flash memory region that enables permanent part
identification through an Electronic Serial Number
(ESN) The 128-word SecSi sector is divided into 64
factory-lockable words that can be programmed and
locked by the customer. The SecSi sector is located at
addresses 000000h-00007Fh in both Persistent Pro-
tection mode and Password Protection mode. It uses
■ Follow the SecSi Sector Protection Algorithm as
shown in Figure 3. This allows in-system protection
of the SecSi Sector without raising any device pin to
a high voltage. Note that this method is only appli-
cable to the SecSi Sector.
Once the SecSi Sector is locked and verified, the sys-
tem must write the Exit SecSi Sector Region com-
mand sequence to return to reading and writing the
remainder of the array.
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
41
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
START
SecSiTM Sector Entry
Write AAh to address 555h
Write 55h to address 2AAh
Write 88h to address 555h
SecSi Sector Entry
SecSi Sector
Protection Entry
Write AAh to address 555h
Write 55h to address 2AAh
Write 60h to address 555h
PLSCNT = 1
Protect SecSi Sector:
write 68h to sector address
with A7–A0 = 00011010
Time out 256 µs
SecSi Sector Protection
Verify SecSi Sector:
write 48h to sector address
with A7–A0 = 00011010
Increment PLSCNT
Read from sector address
with A7–A0 = 00011010
No
No
PLSCNT = 25?
Data = 01h?
Yes
Yes
SecSi Sector
Protection Completed
Device Failed
SecSi Sector Exit
Write 555h/AAh
Write 2AAh/55h
Write SA0+555h/90h
Write XXXh/00h
SecSi Sector Exit
Figure 3. PDL127/9H SecSi Sector Protection Algorithm
The SecSi Sector lock must be used with caution
SecSi Sector Protection Bits
since, once locked, there is no procedure available for
unlocking the SecSi Sector area and none of the bits
in the SecSi Sector memory space can be modified in
any way.
The SecSi Sector Protection Bits prevent program-
ming of the SecSi Sector memory area. Once set, the
SecSi Sector memory area contents are non-modifi-
able.
42
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
edge of WE#. The internal state machine is automati-
Hardware Data Protection
cally reset to the read mode on power-up.
The command sequence requirement of unlock cycles
for programming or erasing provides data protection
against inadvertent writes. In addition, the following
hardware data protection measures prevent accidental
erasure or programming, which might otherwise be
caused by spurious system level signals during VCC
power-up and power-down transitions, or from system
noise.
COMMON FLASH MEMORY INTERFACE
(CFI)
The Common Flash Interface (CFI) specification out-
lines device and host system software interrogation
handshake, which allows specific vendor-specified
software algorithms to be used for entire families of
devices. Software support can then be device-inde-
pendent, JEDEC ID-independent, and forward- and
backward-compatible for the specified flash device
families. Flash vendors can standardize their existing
interfaces for long-term compatibility.
Low VCC Write Inhibit
When VCC is less than VLKO, the device does not ac-
cept any write cycles. This protects data during VCC
power-up and power-down. The command register
and all internal program/erase circuits are disabled,
and the device resets to the read mode. Subsequent
writes are ignored until VCC is greater than VLKO. The
system must provide the proper signals to the control
pins to prevent unintentional writes when VCC is
This device enters the CFI Query mode when the sys-
tem writes the CFI Query command, 98h, to address
55h, any time the device is ready to read array data.
The system can read CFI information at the addresses
given in Tables 12–15. To terminate reading CFI data,
the system must write the reset command. The CFI
Query mode is not accessible when the device is exe-
cuting an Embedded Program or embedded Erase al-
gorithm.
greater than VLKO
.
Write Pulse “Glitch” Protection
Noise pulses of less than 3 ns (typical) on OE#,
CE#f1, CE#f2 or WE# do not initiate a write cycle.
The system can also write the CFI query command
when the device is in the autoselect mode. The device
enters the CFI query mode, and the system can read
CFI data at the addresses given in Tables 12–15. The
system must write the reset command to return the
device to reading array data.
Logical Inhibit
Write cycles are inhibited by holding any one of OE# =
VIL, CE#f1 =CE#f2 = VIH or WE# = VIH. To initiate a
write cycle, CE#f1/CE#f2 and WE# must be a logical
zero while OE# is a logical one.
For further information, please refer to the CFI Specifi-
cation and CFI Publication 100, available via the World
Wide Web at http://www.amd.com/flash/cfi. Alterna-
tively, contact an AMD representative for copies of
these documents.
Power-Up Write Inhibit
If WE# = CE#f1 = VIL and OE# = VIH during power up,
the device does not accept commands on the rising
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
43
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
Table 12. CFI Query Identification String
Description
Addresses
Data
10h
11h
12h
0051h
0052h
0059h
Query Unique ASCII string “QRY”
13h
14h
0002h
0000h
Primary OEM Command Set
15h
16h
0040h
0000h
Address for Primary Extended Table
17h
18h
0000h
0000h
Alternate OEM Command Set (00h = none exists)
Address for Alternate OEM Extended Table (00h = none exists)
19h
1Ah
0000h
0000h
Table 13. System Interface String
Description
Addresses
Data
VCC Min. (write/erase)
D7–D4: volt, D3–D0: 100 millivolt
1Bh
0027h
VCC Max. (write/erase)
D7–D4: volt, D3–D0: 100 millivolt
1Ch
0036h
1Dh
1Eh
1Fh
20h
21h
22h
23h
24h
25h
26h
0000h
0000h
0004h
0000h
0009h
0000h
0005h
0000h
0004h
0000h
VPP Min. voltage (00h = no VPP pin present)
VPP Max. voltage (00h = no VPP pin present)
Typical timeout per single byte/word write 2N µs
Typical timeout for Min. size buffer write 2N µs (00h = not supported)
Typical timeout per individual block erase 2N ms
Typical timeout for full chip erase 2N ms (00h = not supported)
Max. timeout for byte/word write 2N times typical
Max. timeout for buffer write 2N times typical
Max. timeout per individual block erase 2N times typical
Max. timeout for full chip erase 2N times typical (00h = not supported)
44
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
Table 14. Device Geometry Definition
Description
Addresses
Data
27h
0018h
Device Size = 2N byte
28h
29h
0001h
0000h
Flash Device Interface description (refer to CFI publication 100)
2Ah
2Bh
0000h
0000h
Max. number of byte in multi-byte write = 2N
(00h = not supported)
2Ch
0003h
Number of Erase Block Regions within device
2Dh
2Eh
2Fh
30h
0007h
0000h
0020h
0000h
Erase Block Region 1 Information
(refer to the CFI specification or CFI publication 100)
31h
32h
33h
34h
00FDh
0000h
0000h
0001h
Erase Block Region 2 Information
(refer to the CFI specification or CFI publication 100)
35h
36h
37h
38h
0007h
0000h
0020h
0000h
Erase Block Region 3 Information
(refer to the CFI specification or CFI publication 100)
39h
3Ah
3Bh
3Ch
0000h
0000h
0000h
0000h
Erase Block Region 4 Information
(refer to the CFI specification or CFI publication 100)
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
45
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
Table 15. Primary Vendor-Specific Extended Query
Addresses
Data
Description
40h
41h
42h
0050h
0052h
0049h
Query-unique ASCII string “PRI”
43h
44h
0031h
0033h
Major version number, ASCII (reflects modifications to the silicon)
Minor version number, ASCII (reflects modifications to the CFI table)
Address Sensitive Unlock (Bits 1-0)
0 = Required, 1 = Not Required
45h
000Ch
Silicon Revision Number (Bits 7-2)
Erase Suspend
0 = Not Supported, 1 = To Read Only, 2 = To Read & Write
46h
47h
48h
49h
4Ah
4Bh
4Ch
0002h
0001h
0001h
0007h
00E7h
0000h
0002h
Sector Protect
0 = Not Supported, X = Number of sectors in per group
Sector Temporary Unprotect
00 = Not Supported, 01 = Supported
Sector Protect/Unprotect scheme
01 =29F040 mode, 02 = 29F016 mode, 03 = 29F400, 04 = 29LV800 mode
Simultaneous Operation
00 = Not Supported, X = Number of Sectors excluding Bank 1
Burst Mode Type
00 = Not Supported, 01 = Supported
Page Mode Type
00 = Not Supported, 01 = 4 Word Page, 02 = 8 Word Page
ACC (Acceleration) Supply Minimum
4Dh
4Eh
0085h
0095h
00h = Not Supported, D7-D4: Volt, D3-D0: 100 mV
ACC (Acceleration) Supply Maximum
00h = Not Supported, D7-D4: Volt, D3-D0: 100 mV
Top/Bottom Boot Sector Flag
4Fh
0001h
00h = Uniform device, 02h = Bottom Boot Device, 03h = Top Boot Device, 04h = Both
Top and Bottom
Program Suspend
50h
57h
58h
59h
5Ah
5Bh
0001h
0004h
0027h
0060h
0060h
0027h
0 = Not supported, 1 = Supported
Bank Organization
00 = Data at 4Ah is zero, X = Number of Banks
Bank 1 Region Information
X = Number of Sectors in Bank 1
Bank 2 Region Information
X = Number of Sectors in Bank 2
Bank 3 Region Information
X = Number of Sectors in Bank 3
Bank 4 Region Information
X = Number of Sectors in Bank 4
46
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
COMMAND DEFINITIONS
Writing specific address and data commands or se-
quences into the command register initiates device op-
erations. Table 16 defines the valid register command
sequences. Writing incorrect address and data val-
ues or writing them in the improper sequence may
place the device in an unknown state. A reset com-
mand is then required to return the device to reading
array data.
erasing begins. This resets the bank to which the sys-
tem was writing to the read mode. Once erasure be-
gins, however, the device ignores reset commands
until the operation is complete.
The reset command may be written between the
sequence cycles in a program command sequence
before programming begins. This resets the bank to
which the system was writing to the read mode. If the
program command sequence is written to a bank that
is in the Erase Suspend mode, writing the reset
command returns that bank to the erase-sus-
pend-read mode. Once programming begins, however,
the device ignores reset commands until the operation
is complete.
All addresses are latched on the falling edge of WE#
or CE#f1/CE#f2 (PDL129H only), whichever happens
later. All data is latched on the rising edge of WE# or
CE#f1/CE#f2 (PDL129H only), whichever happens
first. Refer to the Flash AC Characteristics section for
timing diagrams.
The reset command may be written between the se-
quence cycles in an autoselect command sequence.
Once in the autoselect mode, the reset command
must be written to return to the read mode. If a bank
entered the autoselect mode while in the Erase Sus-
pend mode, writing the reset command returns that
bank to the erase-suspend-read mode.
Reading Array Data
The device is automatically set to reading array data
after device power-up. No commands are required to
retrieve data. Each bank is ready to read array data
after completing an Embedded Program or Embedded
Erase algorithm.
After the device accepts an Erase Suspend command,
the corresponding bank enters the erase-sus-
pend-read mode, after which the system can read
data from any non-erase-suspended sector within the
same bank. The system can read array data using the
standard read timing, except that if it reads at an ad-
dress within erase-suspended sectors, the device out-
puts status data. After completing a programming
operation in the Erase Suspend mode, the system
may once again read array data with the same excep-
tion. See the Erase Suspend/Erase Resume Com-
mands section for more information.
If DQ5 goes high during a program or erase operation,
writing the reset command returns the banks to the
read mode (or erase-suspend-read mode if that bank
was in Erase Suspend).
Autoselect Command Sequence
The autoselect command sequence allows the host
system to access the manufacturer and device codes,
and determine whether or not a sector is protected.
The autoselect command sequence may be written to
an address within a bank that is either in the read or
erase-suspend-read mode. The autoselect command
may not be written while the device is actively pro-
gramming or erasing in the other bank.
The system must issue the reset command to return a
bank to the read (or erase-suspend-read) mode if DQ5
goes high during an active program or erase opera-
tion, or if the bank is in the autoselect mode. See the
next section, Reset Command, for more information.
The autoselect command sequence is initiated by first
writing two unlock cycles. This is followed by a third
write cycle that contains the bank address and the au-
toselect command. The bank then enters the autose-
lect mode. The system may read any number of
autoselect codes without reinitiating the command se-
quence.
See also Requirements for Reading Array Data in the
MCP Device Bus Operations section for more informa-
tion. The Read-Only Operations – Am29PDL127H and
Read-Only Operations – Am29PDL127H tables pro-
vide the read parameters, and Figure 12 shows the
timing diagram.
Table 16 shows the address and data requirements.
To determine sector protection information, the system
must write to the appropriate bank address (BA) and
sector address (SA). Table 4 shows the address range
and bank number associated with each sector.
Reset Command
Writing the reset command resets the banks to the
read or erase-suspend-read mode. Address bits are
don’t cares for this command.
The system must write the reset command to return to
the read mode (or erase-suspend-read mode if the
bank was previously in Erase Suspend).
The reset command may be written between the se-
quence cycles in an erase command sequence before
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
47
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
Programming is allowed in any sequence and across
Enter SecSi™ Sector/Exit SecSi Sector
Command Sequence
sector boundaries. A bit cannot be programmed
from “0” back to a “1.” Attempting to do so may
cause that bank to set DQ5 = 1, or cause the DQ7 and
DQ6 status bits to indicate the operation was success-
ful. However, a succeeding read will show that the
data is still “0.” Only erase operations can convert a “0”
to a “1.”
The SecSi Sector region provides a secured data area
containing a random, eight word electronic serial num-
ber (ESN). The system can access the SecSi Sector
region by issuing the three-cycle Enter SecSi Sector
command sequence. The device continues to access
the SecSi Sector region until the system issues the
four-cycle Exit SecSi Sector command sequence. The
Exit SecSi Sector command sequence returns the de-
vice to normal operation. The SecSi Sector is not ac-
cessible when the device is executing an Embedded
Program or embedded Erase algorithm. Table 16
shows the address and data requirements for both
command sequences. See also “SecSi™ (Secured Sili-
con) Sector Flash Memory Region” for further informa-
tion. Note that the ACC function and unlock bypass
modes are not available when the SecSi Sector is en-
abled.
Unlock Bypass Command Sequence
The unlock bypass feature allows the system to pro-
gram data to a bank faster than using the standard
program command sequence. The unlock bypass
command sequence is initiated by first writing two un-
lock cycles. This is followed by a third write cycle con-
taining the unlock bypass command, 20h. That bank
then enters the unlock bypass mode. A two-cycle un-
lock bypass program command sequence is all that is
required to program in this mode. The first cycle in this
sequence contains the unlock bypass program com-
mand, A0h; the second cycle contains the program
address and data. Additional data is programmed in
the same manner. This mode dispenses with the initial
two unlock cycles required in the standard program
command sequence, resulting in faster total program-
ming time. Table 16 shows the requirements for the
command sequence.
Word Program Command Sequence
Programming is a four-bus-cycle operation. The pro-
gram command sequence is initiated by writing two
unlock write cycles, followed by the program set-up
command. The program address and data are written
next, which in turn initiate the Embedded Program al-
gorithm. The system is not required to provide further
controls or timings. The device automatically provides
internally generated program pulses and verifies the
programmed cell margin. Table 16 shows the address
and data requirements for the program command se-
quence.
During the unlock bypass mode, only the Unlock By-
pass Program and Unlock Bypass Reset commands
are valid. To exit the unlock bypass mode, the system
must issue the two-cycle unlock bypass reset com-
mand sequence.
The device offers accelerated program operations
through the WP#/ACC pin. When the system asserts
VHH on the WP#/ACC pin, the device automatically en-
ters the Unlock Bypass mode. The system may then
write the two-cycle Unlock Bypass program command
sequence. The device uses the higher voltage on the
WP#/ACC pin to accelerate the operation. Note that
the WP#/ACC pin must not be at VHH any operation
other than accelerated programming, or device dam-
age may result. In addition, the WP#/ACC pin must not
be left floating or unconnected; inconsistent behavior
of the device may result.
When the Embedded Program algorithm is complete,
that bank then returns to the read mode and ad-
dresses are no longer latched. The system can deter-
mine the status of the program operation by using
DQ7, DQ6, or RY/BY#. Refer to the Write Operation
Status section for information on these status bits.
Any commands written to the device during the Em-
bedded Program Algorithm are ignored. Note that a
hardware reset immediately terminates the program
operation. Note that the SecSi sector, autoselect, and
CFI functions are unavailable when the SecSi Sector
is enabled. The program command sequence should
be reinitiated once that bank has returned to the read
mode, to ensure data integrity.
Figure 3 illustrates the algorithm for the program oper-
ation. Refer to the Erase and Program Operations
table in the AC Characteristics section for parameters,
and Figures 12 and 13 for timing diagrams.
48
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
the SecSi sector, autoselect, and CFI functions are un-
available when the SecSi Sector is enabled. If that oc-
curs, the chip erase command sequence should be
reinitiated once that bank has returned to reading
array data, to ensure data integrity.
START
Figure 4 illustrates the algorithm for the erase opera-
tion. Refer to the Erase and Program Operations ta-
bles in the AC Characteristics section for parameters,
and Figure 14 for timing diagrams.
Write Program
Command Sequence
Sector Erase Command Sequence
Data Poll
from System
Embedded
Program
algorithm
in progress
Sector erase is a six bus cycle operation. The sector
erase command sequence is initiated by writing two
unlock cycles, followed by a set-up command. Two ad-
ditional unlock cycles are written, and are then fol-
lowed by the address of the sector to be erased, and
the sector erase command.Table 16 shows the ad-
dress and data requirements for the sector erase com-
mand sequence.
Verify Data?
Yes
No
The device does not require the system to preprogram
prior to erase. The Embedded Erase algorithm auto-
matically programs and verifies the entire memory for
an all zero data pattern prior to electrical erase. The
system is not required to provide any controls or tim-
ings during these operations.
No
Increment Address
Last Address?
Yes
Programming
Completed
After the command sequence is written, a sector erase
time-out of 50 µs occurs. During the time-out period,
additional sector addresses and sector erase com-
mands may be written. Loading the sector erase buffer
may be done in any sequence, and the number of sec-
tors may be from one sector to all sectors. The time
between these additional cycles must be less than 50
µs, otherwise erasure may begin. Any sector erase ad-
dress and command following the exceeded time-out
may or may not be accepted. It is recommended that
processor interrupts be disabled during this time to en-
sure all commands are accepted. The interrupts can
be re-enabled after the last Sector Erase command is
written. Any command other than Sector Erase or
Erase Suspend during the time-out period resets
that bank to the read mode. Note that the SecSi sec-
tor, autoselect, and CFI functions are unavailable
when the SecSi Sector is enabled. The system must
rewrite the command sequence and any additional ad-
dresses and commands.
Note: See Table 16 for program command sequence.
Figure 4. Program Operation
Chip Erase Command Sequence
Chip erase is a six bus cycle operation. The chip erase
command sequence is initiated by writing two unlock
cycles, followed by a set-up command. Two additional
unlock write cycles are then followed by the chip erase
command, which in turn invokes the Embedded Erase
algorithm. The device does not require the system to
preprogram prior to erase. The Embedded Erase algo-
rithm automatically preprograms and verifies the entire
memory for an all zero data pattern prior to electrical
erase. The system is not required to provide any con-
trols or timings during these operations. Table 16
shows the address and data requirements for the chip
erase command sequence.
The system can monitor DQ3 to determine if the sec-
tor erase timer has timed out (See the section on DQ3:
Sector Erase Timer). The time-out begins from the ris-
ing edge of the final WE# pulse in the command
sequence.
When the Embedded Erase algorithm is complete,
that bank returns to the read mode and addresses are
no longer latched. The system can determine the sta-
tus of the erase operation by using DQ7, DQ6, DQ2,
or RY/BY#. Refer to the Write Operation Status sec-
tion for information on these status bits.
When the Embedded Erase algorithm is complete, the
bank returns to reading array data and addresses are
no longer latched. Note that while the Embedded
Erase operation is in progress, the system can read
data from the non-erasing bank. The system can de-
Any commands written during the chip erase operation
are ignored. However, note that a hardware reset im-
mediately terminates the erase operation. Note that
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
49
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
termine the status of the erase operation by reading
period during the sector erase command sequence.
The Erase Suspend command is ignored if written dur-
ing the chip erase operation or Embedded Program
algorithm.
DQ7, DQ6, DQ2, or RY/BY# in the erasing bank. Refer
to the Write Operation Status section for information
on these status bits.
Once the sector erase operation has begun, only the
Erase Suspend command is valid. All other com-
mands are ignored. However, note that a hardware
reset immediately terminates the erase operation. If
that occurs, the sector erase command sequence
should be reinitiated once that bank has returned to
reading array data, to ensure data integrity.
When the Erase Suspend command is written during
the sector erase operation, the device requires a max-
imum of 20 µs to suspend the erase operation. How-
ever, when the Erase Suspend command is written
during the sector erase time-out, the device immedi-
ately terminates the time-out period and suspends the
erase operation. Addresses are “don’t-cares” when
writing the Erase suspend command.
Figure 4 illustrates the algorithm for the erase opera-
tion. Refer to the Erase and Program Operations ta-
bles in the AC Characteristics section for parameters,
and Figure 14 section for timing diagrams.
After the erase operation has been suspended, the
bank enters the erase-suspend-read mode. The sys-
tem can read data from or program data to any sector
not selected for erasure. (The device “erase sus-
pends” all sectors selected for erasure.) Reading at
any address within erase-suspended sectors pro-
duces status information on DQ7–DQ0. The system
can use DQ7, or DQ6 and DQ2 together, to determine
if a sector is actively erasing or is erase-suspended.
Refer to the Write Operation Status section for infor-
mation on these status bits.
START
Write Erase
Command Sequence
(Notes 1, 2)
After an erase-suspended program operation is com-
plete, the bank returns to the erase-suspend-read
mode. The system can determine the status of the
program operation using the DQ7 or DQ6 status bits,
just as in the standard Word Program operation.
Refer to the Write Operation Status section for more
information.
Data Poll to Erasing
Bank from System
Embedded
Erase
algorithm
in progress
In the erase-suspend-read mode, the system can also
issue the autoselect command sequence. The device
allows reading autoselect codes even at addresses
within erasing sectors, since the codes are not stored
in the memory array. When the device exits the au-
toselect mode, the device reverts to the Erase Sus-
pend mode, and is ready for another valid operation.
Refer to the Autoselect Command Sequence sections
for details.
No
Data = FFh?
Yes
Erasure Completed
To resume the sector erase operation, the system
must write the Erase Resume command (address bits
are don’t care). The bank address of the erase-sus-
pended bank is required when writing this command.
Further writes of the Resume command are ignored.
Another Erase Suspend command can be written after
the chip has resumed erasing.
Notes:
1. See Table 16 for erase command sequence.
2. See the section on DQ3 for information on the sector
erase timer.
Figure 5. Erase Operation
Erase Suspend/Erase Resume
Commands
Password Program Command
The Password Program Command permits program-
ming the password that is used as part of the hard-
ware protection scheme. The actual password is
64-bits long. Four Password Program commands are
required to program the password. The system must
enter the unlock cycle, password program command
(38h) and the program address/data for each portion
The Erase Suspend command, B0h, allows the sys-
tem to interrupt a sector erase operation and then read
data from, or program data to, any sector not selected
for erasure. The bank address is required when writing
this command. This command is valid only during the
sector erase operation, including the 80 µs time-out
50
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
of the password when programming. There are no pro-
Persistent Sector Protection Mode
Locking Bit Program Command
visions for entering the 2-cycle unlock cycle, the pass-
word program command, and all the password data.
There is no special addressing order required for pro-
gramming the password. Also, when the password is
undergoing programming, Simultaneous Operation is
disabled. Read operations to any memory location will
return the programming status. Once programming is
complete, the user must issue a Read/Reset com-
mand to return the device to normal operation. Once
the Password is written and verified, the Password
Mode Locking Bit must be set in order to prevent verifi-
cation. The Password Program Command is only ca-
pable of programming “0”s. Programming a “1” after a
cell is programmed as a “0” results in a time-out by the
Embedded Program Algorithm™ with the cell remain-
ing as a “0”. The password is all ones when shipped
from the factory. All 64-bit password combinations are
valid as a password.
The Persistent Sector Protection Mode Locking Bit
Program Command programs the Persistent Sector
Protection Mode Locking Bit, which prevents the Pass-
word Mode Locking Bit from ever being programmed.
If the Persistent Sector Protection Mode Locking Bit is
verified as programmed without margin, the Persistent
Sector Protection Mode Locking Bit Program Com-
mand should be reissued to improve program margin.
By disabling the program circuitry of the Password
Mode Locking Bit, the device is forced to remain in the
Persistent Sector Protection mode of operation, once
this bit is set. Exiting the Persistent Protection Mode
Locking Bit Program command is accomplished by
writing the Read/Reset command.
SecSi Sector Protection Bit Program
Command
Password Verify Command
The SecSi Sector Protection Bit Program Command
programs the SecSi Sector Protection Bit, which pre-
vents the SecSi sector memory from being cleared. If
the SecSi Sector Protection Bit is verified as pro-
grammed without margin, the SecSi Sector Protection
Bit Program Command should be reissued to improve
program margin. Exiting the VCC-level SecSi Sector
Protection Bit Program Command is accomplished by
writing the Read/Reset command.
The Password Verify Command is used to verify the
Password. The Password is verifiable only when the
Password Mode Locking Bit is not programmed. If the
Password Mode Locking Bit is programmed and the
user attempts to verify the Password, the device will al-
ways drive all F’s onto the DQ data bus.
The Password Verify command is permitted if the
SecSi sector is enabled. Also, the device will not oper-
ate in Simultaneous Operation when the Password
Verify command is executed. Only the password is re-
turned regardless of the bank address. The lower two
address bits (A1-A0) are valid during the Password
Verify. Writing the Read/Reset command returns the
device back to normal operation.
PPB Lock Bit Set Command
The PPB Lock Bit Set command is used to set the
PPB Lock bit if it is cleared either at reset or if the
Password Unlock command was successfully exe-
cuted. There is no PPB Lock Bit Clear command.
Once the PPB Lock Bit is set, it cannot be cleared un-
less the device is taken through a power-on clear or
the Password Unlock command is executed. Upon set-
ting the PPB Lock Bit, the PPBs are latched into the
DYBs. If the Password Mode Locking Bit is set, the
PPB Lock Bit status is reflected as set, even after a
power-on reset cycle. Exiting the PPB Lock Bit Set
command is accomplished by writing the Read/Reset
command (only in the Persistent Protection Mode).
Password Protection Mode Locking Bit
Program Command
The Password Protection Mode Locking Bit Program
Command programs the Password Protection Mode
Locking Bit, which prevents further verifies or updates
to the Password. Once programmed, the Password
Protection Mode Locking Bit cannot be erased! If the
Password Protection Mode Locking Bit is verified as
program without margin, the Password Protection
Mode Locking Bit Program command can be executed
to improve the program margin. Once the Password
Protection Mode Locking Bit is programmed, the Per-
sistent Sector Protection Locking Bit program circuitry
is disabled, thereby forcing the device to remain in the
Password Protection mode. Exiting the Mode Locking
Bit Program command is accomplished by writing the
Read/Reset command.
DYB Write Command
The DYB Write command is used to set or clear a DYB
for a given sector. The high order address bits
A22-A12 for PDL127 and (A21–A12) for PDL129H are
issued at the same time as the code 01h or 00h on
DQ7-DQ0. All other DQ data bus pins are ignored dur-
ing the data write cycle. The DYBs are modifiable at
any time, regardless of the state of the PPB or PPB
Lock Bit. The DYBs are cleared at power-up or hard-
ware reset. Exiting the DYB Write command is accom-
plished by writing the Read/Reset command.
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
51
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
determine whether the PPB has been erased with
Password Unlock Command
margin. If the PPBs has been erased without margin,
the erase command should be reissued to improve the
program margin.
The Password Unlock command is used to clear the
PPB Lock Bit so that the PPBs can be unlocked for
modification, thereby allowing the PPBs to become ac-
cessible for modification. The exact password must be
entered in order for the unlocking function to occur.
This command cannot be issued any faster than 2 µs
at a time to prevent a hacker from running through all
64-bit combinations in an attempt to correctly match a
password. If the command is issued before the 2 µs
execution window for each portion of the unlock, the
command will be ignored.
It is the responsibility of the user to preprogram all
PPBs prior to issuing the All PPB Erase command. If
the user attempts to erase a cleared PPB, over-era-
sure may occur making it difficult to program the PPB
at a later time. Also note that the total number of PPB
program/erase cycles is limited to 100 cycles. Cycling
the PPBs beyond 100 cycles is not guaranteed.
DYB Write Command
Once the Password Unlock command is entered, the
RY/BY# indicates that the device is busy. Approxi-
mately 1 µs is required for each portion of the unlock.
Once the first portion of the password unlock com-
pletes (RY/BY# is not low or DQ6 does not toggle
when read), the next part of the password is written.
The system must thus monitor RY/BY# or the status
bits to confirm when to write the next portion of the
password. Seven cycles are required to successfully
clear the PPB Lock Bit.
The DYB Write command is used for setting the DYB,
which is a volatile bit that is cleared at reset. There is
one DYB per sector. If the PPB is set, the sector is pro-
tected regardless of the value of the DYB. If the PPB is
cleared, setting the DYB to a 1 protects the sector from
programs or erases. Since this is a volatile bit, remov-
ing power or resetting the device will clear the DYBs.
The bank address is latched when the command is
written.
PPB Lock Bit Set Command
PPB Program Command
The PPB Lock Bit set command is used for setting the
DYB, which is a volatile bit that is cleared at reset.
There is one DYB per sector. If the PPB is set, the sec-
tor is protected regardless of the value of the DYB. If
the PPB is cleared, setting the DYB to a 1 protects the
sector from programs or erases. Since this is a volatile
bit, removing power or resetting the device will clear
the DYBs. The bank address is latched when the com-
mand is written.
The PPB Program command is used to program, or
set, a given PPB. Each PPB is individually pro-
grammed (but is bulk erased with the other PPBs).
The specific sector address (A21–A12) are written at
the same time as the program command 60h with A6
= 0. If the PPB Lock Bit is set and the corresponding
PPB is set for the sector, the PPB Program command
will not execute and the command will time-out without
programming the PPB.
After programming a PPB, two additional cycles are
needed to determine whether the PPB has been pro-
grammed with margin. If the PPB has been pro-
grammed without margin, the program command
should be reissued to improve the program margin.
Also note that the total number of PPB program/erase
cycles is limited to 100 cycles. Cycling the PPBs be-
yond 100 cycles is not guaranteed.
PPB Status Command
The programming of the PPB for a given sector can be
verified by writing a PPB status verify command to the
device.
PPB Lock Bit Status Command
The programming of the PPB Lock Bit for a given sec-
tor can be verified by writing a PPB Lock Bit status ver-
ify command to the device.
The PPB Program command does not follow the Em-
bedded Program algorithm.
Sector Protection Status Command
The programming of either the PPB or DYB for a given
sector or sector group can be verified by writing a Sec-
tor Protection Status command to the device.
All PPB Erase Command
The All PPB Erase command is used to erase all
PPBs in bulk. There is no means for individually eras-
ing a specific PPB. Unlike the PPB program, no spe-
cific sector address is required. However, when the
PPB erase command is written all Sector PPBs are
erased in parallel. If the PPB Lock Bit is set the ALL
PPB Erase command will not execute and the com-
mand will time-out without erasing the PPBs. After
erasing the PPBs, two additional cycles are needed to
Note that there is no single command to independently
verify the programming of a DYB for a given sector
group.
52
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
Command Definitions Tables
Table 16. Memory Array Command Definitions
Bus Cycles (Notes 1–4)
Command (Notes)
Addr Data Addr Data Addr Data
RA RD
XXX F0
Addr
Data
Addr
Data
Addr
Data
Read (5)
Reset (6)
1
1
4
6
Manufacturer ID
555
555
AA 2AA
55
55
555
555
90 (BA)X00
90 (BA)X01
01
7E
Device ID (10)
AA 2AA
(BA)X0E (Note 10) (BA)X0F
00
Autoselect
(Note 7)
SecSi Sector Factory
Protect (8)
(see
note 8)
4
4
555
AA 2AA
55
55
555
555
90
X03
Sector Group Protect
Verify (9)
XX00/
XX01
555 AAA 2AA
90 (SA)X02
Program
4
6
6
1
1
1
2
3
2
2
1
2
555
555
555
BA
BA
55
AA 2AA
AA 2AA
AA 2AA
B0
55
55
55
555
555
555
A0
80
80
PA
555
555
PD
AA
AA
Chip Erase
Sector Erase
2AA
2AA
55
55
555
SA
10
30
Program/Erase Suspend (11)
Program/Erase Resume (12)
CFI Query (13)
30
98
Accelerated Program (15)
Unlock Bypass Entry (15)
Unlock Bypass Program (15)
Unlock Bypass Erase (15)
Unlock Bypass CFI (13, 15)
Unlock Bypass Reset (15)
XX
555
XX
XX
XX
A0
PA
PD
55
AA 2AA
555
20
A0
80
98
PA
PD
10
XX
XXX 90 XXX 00
Legend:
BA = Address of bank switching to autoselect mode, bypass mode, or
erase operation. Determined by A22:A20, (A21:A20 for PDL129) see
Tables 4 and 5 for more detail.
PA = Program Address (A22:A0) (A21:A0 for PDL129). Addresses
latch on falling edge of WE# or CE#f1/CE#f2 (PDL129 only) pulse,
whichever happens later.
PD = Program Data (DQ15:DQ0) written to location PA. Data latches
on rising edge of WE# or CE#f1/CE#f2 (PDL129 only) pulse,
whichever happens first.
RA = Read Address (A22:A0) (A21:A0 for PDL129).
RD = Read Data (DQ15:DQ0) from location RA.
SA = Sector Address (A22:A12) (A21:A12 for PDL129) for verifying (in
autoselect mode) or erasing.
WD = Write Data. See “Configuration Register” definition for specific
write data. Data latched on rising edge of WE#.
X = Don’t care
Notes:
1. See Table 1 for description of bus operations.
8. The data is C0h for factory or customer locked and 80h for factory
locked.
2. All values are in hexadecimal.
9. The data is 00h for an unprotected sector group and 01h for a
protected sector group.
3. Shaded cells in table denote read cycles. All other cycles are
write operations.
10. Device ID must be read across cycles 4, 5, and 6. 20 for
Am29PDL127H and 21 for Am29PDL129H.
4. During unlock and command cycles, when lower address bits are
555 or 2AAh as shown in table, address bits higher than A11
(except where BA is required) and data bits higher than DQ7 are
don’t cares.
11. System may read and program in non-erasing sectors, or enter
autoselect mode, when in Program/Erase Suspend mode.
Program/Erase Suspend command is valid only during a sector
erase operation, and requires bank address.
5. No unlock or command cycles required when bank is reading
array data.
12. Program/Erase Resume command is valid only during Erase
Suspend mode, and requires bank address.
6. The Reset command is required to return to reading array (or to
erase-suspend-read mode if previously in Erase Suspend) when
bank is in autoselect mode, or if DQ5 goes high (while bank is
providing status information).
13. Command is valid when device is ready to read array data or
when device is in autoselect mode.
7. Fourth cycle of autoselect command sequence is a read cycle.
System must provide bank address to obtain manufacturer ID or
device ID information. See Autoselect Command Sequence
section for more information.
14. WP#/ACC must be at VID during the entire operation of command.
15. Unlock Bypass Entry command is required prior to any Unlock
Bypass operation. Unlock Bypass Reset command is required to
return to the reading array.
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
53
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
Table 17. Sector Protection Command Definitions
Bus Cycles (Notes 1-4)
Command
(Notes)
Addr Data Addr Data Addr Data
Addr
Data
Addr
Data
Addr
Data
Addr
Data
Reset
1
3
4
XXX
555
555
F0
SecSi Sector Entry
SecSi Sector Exit
AA 2AA
AA 2AA
55
55
555
555
88
90
XX
00
68
SecSi Protection
Bit Program (5, 6)
6
5
4
4
7
555
555
555
555
555
AA 2AA
AA 2AA
AA 2AA
AA 2AA
AA 2AA
55
55
55
55
55
555
555
555
555
555
60
60
38
C8
28
OW
OW
OW
48
OW
RD(0)
SecSi Protection
Bit Status
OW
48
RD(0)
PasswordProgram
(5, 7, 8)
XX[0-3]
PWA[0-3]
PWA[0]
PD[0-3]
PWD[0-3]
PWD[0]
Password Verify (6,
8, 9)
Password Unlock
(7, 10, 11)
PWA[1]
PWD[1]
PWA[2]
(SA)WP
PWD[2]
RD(0)
PWA[3]
PWD[3]
PPBProgram (5, 6,
12, 17)
6
5
6
555
555
555
AA 2AA
AA 2AA
AA 2AA
55
55
55
555
555
555
60
60
60
(SA)WP
(SA)WP
WP
68
48
60
(SA)WP
(SA)WP
(SA)
48
RD (0)
40
PPB Status
All PPB Erase (5,
6, 13, 14)
(SA)WP
RD(0)
PPB Lock Bit Set
(17)
3
4
555
555
AA 2AA
AA 2AA
55
55
555
555
78
58
PPB Lock Bit
Status (15)
SA
RD(1)
DYB Write (7)
4
4
4
555
555
555
AA 2AA
AA 2AA
AA 2AA
55
55
55
555
555
555
48
48
58
SA
SA
SA
X1
X0
DYB Erase (7)
DYB Status (6, 18)
RD(0)
PPMLB Program
(5, 6, 12)
6
5
6
5
555
555
555
555
AA 2AA
AA 2AA
AA 2AA
AA 2AA
55
55
55
55
555
555
555
555
60
60
60
60
PL
PL
SL
SL
68
48
68
48
PL
PL
SL
SL
48
PL
SL
RD(0)
RD(0)
PPMLB Status (5)
RD(0)
48
SPMLB Program
(5, 6, 12)
SPMLB Status (5)
RD(0)
Legend:
DYB = Dynamic Protection Bit
RD(1) = Read Data DQ1 for PPB Lock status.
OW = Address (A7:A0) is (00011010)
PD[3:0] = Password Data (1 of 4 portions)
PPB = Persistent Protection Bit
PWA = Password Address. A1:A0 selects portion of password.
PWD = Password Data being verified.
SA = Sector Address where security command applies. Address bits
A21:A12 uniquely select any sector.
SL = Persistent Protection Mode Lock Address (A7:A0) is (00010010)
WP = PPB Address (A7:A0) is (00000010) (Note16)
X = Don’t care
PPMLB = Password Protection Mode Locking Bit
SPMLB = Persistent Protection Mode Locking Bit
PL = Password Protection Mode Lock Address (A7:A0) is (00001010)
RD(0) = Read Data DQ0 for protection indicator bit.
1. See Table 1 for description of bus operations.
2. All values are in hexadecimal.
10. The password is written over four consecutive cycles, at
addresses 0-3.
11. A 2 µs timeout is required between any two portions of password.
12. A 100 µs timeout is required between cycles 4 and 5.
13. A 1.2 ms timeout is required between cycles 4 and 5.
3. Shaded cells in table denote read cycles. All other cycles are
write operations.
4. During unlock and command cycles, when lower address bits are
555 or 2AAh as shown in table, address bits higher than A11
(except where BA is required) and data bits higher than DQ7 are
don’t cares.
14. Cycle 4 erases all PPBs. Cycles 5 and 6 validate bits have been
fully erased when DQ0 = 0. If DQ0 = 1 in cycle 6, erase command
must be issued and verified again. Before issuing erase
command, all PPBs should be programmed to prevent PPB
overerasure.
5. The reset command returns device to reading array.
6. Cycle 4 programs the addressed locking bit. Cycles 5 and 6
validate bit has been fully programmed when DQ0 = 1. If DQ0 = 0
in cycle 6, program command must be issued and verified again.
15. DQ1 = 1 if PPB locked, 0 if unlocked.
16. For PDL128G and PDL640G, the WP address is 0111010. The
EP address (PPB Erase Address) is 1111010.
7. Data is latched on the rising edge of WE#.
8. Entire command sequence must be entered for each portion of
password.
17. Following the final cycle of the command sequence, the user must
write the first three cycles of the Autoselect command and then
write a Reset command.
9. Command sequence returns FFh if PPMLB is set.
18. If checking the DYB status of sectors in multiple banks, the user
must follow Note 17 before crossing a bank boundary.
54
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
WRITE OPERATION STATUS
The device provides several bits to determine the status of a
program or erase operation: DQ2, DQ3, DQ5, DQ6, and
DQ7. Table 18 and the following subsections describe the
function of these bits. DQ7 and DQ6 each offer a method for
determining whether a program or erase operation is com-
plete or in progress. The device also provides a hard-
ware-based output signal, RY/BY#, to determine whether
an Embedded Program or Erase operation is in progress or
has been completed.
pleted the program or erase operation and DQ7 has
valid data, the data outputs on DQ15–DQ0 may be still
invalid. Valid data on DQ15–DQ0 will appear on suc-
cessive read cycles.
Table 18 shows the outputs for Data# Polling on DQ7.
Figure 5 shows the Data# Polling algorithm. Figure 5
in the Flash AC Characteristics section shows the
Data# Polling timing diagram.
DQ7: Data# Polling
The Data# Polling bit, DQ7, indicates to the host system
whether an Embedded Program or Erase algorithm is in
progress or completed, or whether a bank is in Erase Sus-
pend. Data# Polling is valid after the rising edge of the final
WE# pulse in the command sequence.
START
Read DQ7–DQ0
Addr = VA
During the Embedded Program algorithm, the device out-
puts on DQ7 the complement of the datum programmed to
DQ7. This DQ7 status also applies to programming during
Erase Suspend. When the Embedded Program algorithm is
complete, the device outputs the datum programmed to
DQ7. The system must provide the program address to
read valid status information on DQ7. If a program address
falls within a protected sector, Data# Polling on DQ7 is ac-
tive for approximately 1 µs, then that bank returns to the
read mode.
Yes
DQ7 = Data?
No
No
DQ5 = 1?
During the Embedded Erase algorithm, Data# Polling
produces a “0” on DQ7. When the Embedded Erase
algorithm is complete, or if the bank enters the Erase
Suspend mode, Data# Polling produces a “1” on DQ7.
The system must provide an address within any of the
sectors selected for erasure to read valid status infor-
mation on DQ7.
Yes
Read DQ7–DQ0
Addr = VA
After an erase command sequence is written, if all
sectors selected for erasing are protected, Data# Poll-
ing on DQ7 is active for approximately 400 µs, then the
bank returns to the read mode. If not all selected sec-
tors are protected, the Embedded Erase algorithm
erases the unprotected sectors, and ignores the se-
lected sectors that are protected. However, if the sys-
tem reads DQ7 at an address within a protected
sector, the status may not be valid.
Yes
DQ7 = Data?
No
PASS
FAIL
Notes:
When the system detects DQ7 has changed from the
complement to true data, it can read valid data at
DQ15–DQ0 on the following read cycles. Just prior to
the completion of an Embedded Program or Erase op-
eration, DQ7 may change asynchronously with
DQ15–DQ0 while Output Enable (OE#) is asserted
low. That is, the device may change from providing
status information to valid data on DQ7. Depending on
when the system samples the DQ7 output, it may read
the status or valid data. Even if the device has com-
1. VA = Valid address for programming. During a sector
erase operation, a valid address is any sector address
within the sector being erased. During chip erase, a
valid address is any non-protected sector address.
2. DQ7 should be rechecked even if DQ5 = “1” because
DQ7 may change simultaneously with DQ5.
Figure 6. Data# Polling Algorithm
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
55
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
DQ6 also toggles during the erase-suspend-program
RY/BY#: Ready/Busy#
mode, and stops toggling once the Embedded Pro-
gram algorithm is complete.
The RY/BY# is a dedicated, open-drain output pin
which indicates whether an Embedded Algorithm is in
progress or complete. The RY/BY# status is valid after
the rising edge of the final WE# pulse in the command
sequence. Since RY/BY# is an open-drain output, sev-
eral RY/BY# pins can be tied together in parallel with a
Table 18 shows the outputs for Toggle Bit I on DQ6.
Figure 6 shows the toggle bit algorithm. Figure 17 in
the “Flash AC Characteristics” section shows the tog-
gle bit timing diagrams. Figure 18 shows the differ-
ences between DQ2 and DQ6 in graphical form. See
also the subsection on DQ2: Toggle Bit II.
pull-up resistor to VCC
.
If the output is low (Busy), the device is actively eras-
ing or programming. (This includes programming in
the Erase Suspend mode.) If the output is high
(Ready), the device is in the read mode, the standby
mode, or one of the banks is in the erase-sus-
pend-read mode.
START
Read Byte
(DQ7–DQ0)
Address =VA
Table 18 shows the outputs for RY/BY#.
DQ6: Toggle Bit I
Toggle Bit I on DQ6 indicates whether an Embedded
Program or Erase algorithm is in progress or com-
plete, or whether the device has entered the Erase
Suspend mode. Toggle Bit I may be read at any ad-
dress, and is valid after the rising edge of the final
WE# pulse in the command sequence (prior to the
program or erase operation), and during the sector
erase time-out.
Read Byte
(DQ7–DQ0)
Address =VA
No
Toggle Bit
= Toggle?
During an Embedded Program or Erase algorithm op-
eration, successive read cycles to any address cause
DQ6 to toggle. The system may use either OE# or
CE#f1 to control the read cycles. When the operation
is complete, DQ6 stops toggling.
Yes
No
DQ5 = 1?
Yes
After an erase command sequence is written, if all
sectors selected for erasing are protected, DQ6 tog-
gles for approximately 400 µs, then returns to reading
array data. If not all selected sectors are protected, the
Embedded Erase algorithm erases the unprotected
sectors, and ignores the selected sectors that are pro-
tected.
Read Byte Twice
(DQ7–DQ0)
Address = VA
The system can use DQ6 and DQ2 together to deter-
mine whether a sector is actively erasing or is
erase-suspended. When the device is actively erasing
(that is, the Embedded Erase algorithm is in progress),
DQ6 toggles. When the device enters the Erase Sus-
pend mode, DQ6 stops toggling. However, the system
must also use DQ2 to determine which sectors are
erasing or erase-suspended. Alternatively, the system
can use DQ7 (see the subsection on DQ7: Data# Poll-
ing).
Toggle Bit
= Toggle?
No
Yes
Program/Erase
Operation Not
Complete, Write
Reset Command
Program/Erase
Operation Complete
Note: The system should recheck the toggle bit even if DQ5
= “1” because the toggle bit may stop toggling as DQ5
changes to “1.” See the subsections on DQ6 and DQ2 for
more information.
If a program address falls within a protected sector,
DQ6 toggles for approximately 1 µs after the program
command sequence is written, then returns to reading
array data.
Figure 7. Toggle Bit Algorithm
56
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
The remaining scenario is that the system initially de-
DQ2: Toggle Bit II
termines that the toggle bit is toggling and DQ5 has
not gone high. The system may continue to monitor
the toggle bit and DQ5 through successive read cy-
cles, determining the status as described in the previ-
ous paragraph. Alternatively, it may choose to perform
other system tasks. In this case, the system must start
at the beginning of the algorithm when it returns to de-
termine the status of the operation (top of Figure 6).
The “Toggle Bit II” on DQ2, when used with DQ6, indi-
cates whether a particular sector is actively erasing
(that is, the Embedded Erase algorithm is in progress),
or whether that sector is erase-suspended. Toggle Bit
II is valid after the rising edge of the final WE# pulse in
the command sequence.
DQ2 toggles when the system reads at addresses
within those sectors that have been selected for era-
sure. (The system may use either OE# or CE#f1 to
control the read cycles.) But DQ2 cannot distinguish
whether the sector is actively erasing or is erase-sus-
pended. DQ6, by comparison, indicates whether the
device is actively erasing, or is in Erase Suspend, but
cannot distinguish which sectors are selected for era-
sure. Thus, both status bits are required for sector and
mode information. Refer to Table 18 to compare out-
puts for DQ2 and DQ6.
DQ5: Exceeded Timing Limits
DQ5 indicates whether the program or erase time has
exceeded a specified internal pulse count limit. Under these
conditions DQ5 produces a “1,” indicating that the program
or erase cycle was not successfully completed.
The device may output a “1” on DQ5 if the system tries
to program a “1” to a location that was previously pro-
grammed to “0.” Only an erase operation can
change a “0” back to a “1.” Under this condition, the
device halts the operation, and when the timing limit
has been exceeded, DQ5 produces a “1.”
Figure 6 shows the toggle bit algorithm in flowchart
form, and the section “DQ2: Toggle Bit II” explains the
algorithm. See also the DQ6: Toggle Bit I subsection.
Figure 17 shows the toggle bit timing diagram. Figure
18 shows the differences between DQ2 and DQ6 in
graphical form.
Under both these conditions, the system must write
the reset command to return to the read mode (or to
the erase-suspend-read mode if a bank was previ-
ously in the erase-suspend-program mode).
Reading Toggle Bits DQ6/DQ2
DQ3: Sector Erase Timer
Refer to Figure 6 for the following discussion. When-
ever the system initially begins reading toggle bit sta-
tus, it must read DQ7–DQ0 at least twice in a row to
determine whether a toggle bit is toggling. Typically,
the system would note and store the value of the tog-
gle bit after the first read. After the second read, the
system would compare the new value of the toggle bit
with the first. If the toggle bit is not toggling, the device
has completed the program or erase operation. The
system can read array data on DQ7–DQ0 on the fol-
lowing read cycle.
After writing a sector erase command sequence, the
system may read DQ3 to determine whether or not
erasure has begun. (The sector erase timer does not
apply to the chip erase command.) If additional
sectors are selected for erasure, the entire time-out
also applies after each additional sector erase com-
mand. When the time-out period is complete, DQ3
switches from a “0” to a “1.” See also the Sector Erase
Command Sequence section.
After the sector erase command is written, the system
should read the status of DQ7 (Data# Polling) or DQ6
(Toggle Bit I) to ensure that the device has accepted
the command sequence, and then read DQ3. If DQ3 is
“1,” the Embedded Erase algorithm has begun; all fur-
ther commands (except Erase Suspend) are ignored
until the erase operation is complete. If DQ3 is “0,” the
device will accept additional sector erase commands.
To ensure the command has been accepted, the sys-
tem software should check the status of DQ3 prior to
and following each subsequent sector erase com-
mand. If DQ3 is high on the second status check, the
last command might not have been accepted.
However, if after the initial two read cycles, the system
determines that the toggle bit is still toggling, the sys-
tem also should note whether the value of DQ5 is high
(see the section on DQ5). If it is, the system should
then determine again whether the toggle bit is tog-
gling, since the toggle bit may have stopped toggling
just as DQ5 went high. If the toggle bit is no longer
toggling, the device has successfully completed the
program or erase operation. If it is still toggling, the de-
vice did not completed the operation successfully, and
the system must write the reset command to return to
reading array data.
Table 18 shows the status of DQ3 relative to the other
status bits.
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
57
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
Table 18. Write Operation Status
DQ7
DQ5
DQ2
Status
(Note 2)
DQ6
(Note 1)
DQ3
N/A
1
(Note 2)
RY/BY#
Embedded Program Algorithm
Embedded Erase Algorithm
Erase
Erase-Suspend-
Read
DQ7#
0
Toggle
Toggle
0
0
No toggle
Toggle
0
0
Standard
Mode
1
No toggle
0
N/A
Toggle
1
Suspended Sector
Erase
Suspend
Mode
Non-Erase
Suspended Sector
Data
Data
Data
0
Data
N/A
Data
N/A
1
0
Erase-Suspend-Program
DQ7#
Toggle
Notes:
1. DQ5 switches to ‘1’ when an Embedded Program or Embedded Erase operation has exceeded the maximum timing limits.
Refer to the section on DQ5 for more information.
2. DQ7 and DQ2 require a valid address when reading status information. Refer to the appropriate subsection for further
details.
3. When reading write operation status bits, the system must always provide the bank address where the Embedded Algorithm
is in progress. The device outputs array data if the system addresses a non-busy bank.
58
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS
Storage Temperature
Plastic Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . –55°C to +125°C
20 ns
20 ns
Ambient Temperature
with Power Applied. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . –40°C to +85°C
+0.8 V
Voltage with Respect to Ground
–0.5 V
–2.0 V
VCCf, VCCs (Note 1) . . . . . . . . . . . .–0.5 V to +4.0 V
RESET# (Note 2) . . . . . . . . . . . .–0.5 V to +12.5 V
WP#/ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .–0.5 V to +10.5 V
All other pins (Note 1) . . . . . . –0.5 V to VCC +0.5 V
Output Short Circuit Current (Note 3) . . . . . . 200 mA
20 ns
Figure 8. Maximum Negative
Overshoot Waveform
Notes:
1. Minimum DC voltage on input or I/O pins is –0.5 V.
During voltage transitions, input or I/O pins may
overshoot VSS to –2.0 V for periods of up to 20 ns.
Maximum DC voltage on input or I/O pins is VCC +0.5 V.
See Figure 8. During voltage transitions, input or I/O pins
may overshoot to VCC +2.0 V for periods up to 20 ns. See
Figure 9.
20 ns
VCC
+2.0 V
2. Minimum DC input voltage on pins RESET#, and
WP#/ACC is –0.5 V. During voltage transitions,
WP#/ACC, and RESET# may overshoot VSS to –2.0 V for
periods of up to 20 ns. See Figure 8. Maximum DC input
voltage on pin RESET# is +12.5 V which may overshoot
to +14.0 V for periods up to 20 ns. Maximum DC input
voltage on WP#/ACC is +9.5 V which may overshoot to
+12.0 V for periods up to 20 ns.
VCC
+0.5 V
2.0 V
20 ns
20 ns
Figure 9. Maximum Positive
Overshoot Waveform
3. No more than one output may be shorted to ground at a
time. Duration of the short circuit should not be greater
than one second.
Stresses above those listed under “Absolute Maximum
Ratings” may cause permanent damage to the device. This
is a stress rating only; functional operation of the device at
these or any other conditions above those indicated in the
operational sections of this data sheet is not implied.
Exposure of the device to absolute maximum rating
conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability.
OPERATING RANGES
Industrial (I) Devices
Ambient Temperature (TA) . . . . . . . . . –40°C to +85°C
V
CCf/VCCs Supply Voltages
VCCf/VCCs for standard voltage range . .2.7 V to 3.1 V
Operating ranges define those limits between which the
functionality of the device is guaranteed.
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
59
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
DC CHARACTERISTICS
CMOS Compatible
Parameter
Symbol
Parameter Description
Test Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
VIN = VSS to VCC
,
ILI
Input Load Current
1.0
µA
VCC = VCC max
ILIT
ILR
A9, OE#, RESET# Input Load Current
Reset Leakage Current
VCC = VCC max; VID= 12.5 V
VCC = VCC max; VID= 12.5 V
35
35
µA
µA
VOUT = VSS to VCC, OE# = VIH
VCC = VCC max
ILO
Output Leakage Current
1.0
µA
5 MHz
20
45
15
30
55
25
OE# = VIH, VCC = VCC max
(Note 1)
ICC1
VCC Active Read Current (Notes 1, 2, 3)
mA
10 MHz
ICC2
ICC3
ICC4
ICC5
VCC Active Write Current (Notes 1, 3, 4)
VCC Standby Current (Note 3)
OE# = VIH, WE# = VIL
mA
µA
µA
µA
CE#f1, CE#f2 (PDL129 only),
1
1
1
5
5
5
RESET#, WP/ACC# = VIO 0.3 V
VCC Reset Current (Note 3)
RESET# = VSS 0.3 V, CE# = VSS
VIH = VIO 0.3 V;
VIL = VSS 0.3 V, CE# = VSS
Automatic Sleep Mode (Notes 3, 5)
VCC Active Read-While-Program Current
(Notes 1, 2, 3)
ICC6
ICC7
ICC8
OE# = VIH
OE# = VIH
OE# = VIH
Word
Word
21
21
17
45
45
25
mA
mA
mA
VCC Active Read-While-Erase Current
(Notes 1, 2, 3)
VCC Active Program-While-Erase-
Suspended Current (Notes 1, 3, 6)
VIL
VIH
VHH
Input Low Voltage
VIO = 2.7–3.6 V
VIO = 2.7–3.6 V
VCC = 3.0 V 10%
–0.5
2.0
0.8
V
V
V
V
CC+0.3
Input High Voltage
Voltage for ACC Program Acceleration
8.5
9.5
12.5
0.4
Voltage for Autoselect and Temporary
Sector Unprotect
VID
VCC = 3.0 V 10%
11.5
V
VOL
VOH
VLKO
Output Low Voltage
IOL = 2.0 mA, VCC = VCC min
IOH = –2.0 mA, VCC = VCC min
V
V
V
Output High Voltage
2.4
2.3
Low VCC Lock-Out Voltage (Note 6)
2.5
Notes:
1. Valid CE#f1/CE#f2 conditions (PDL129 only): (CE#f1= VIL, CE#f2=
IH) or (CE#f1= VIH, CE#f2= VIL)
4. ICC active while Embedded Erase or Embedded Program is in
progress.
V
2. The ICC current listed is typically less than 5 mA/MHz, with OE# at
VIH.
5. Automatic sleep mode enables the low power mode when
addresses remain stable for tACC + 150 ns. Typical sleep mode
current is 1 µA.
3. Maximum ICC specifications are tested with VCC = VCCmax
.
6. Not 100% tested.
60
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
PSRAM DC CHARACTERISTICS
Recommended DC Operating Conditions (Note 1)
Item
Symbol
VCC
Min
2.7
0
Typ
2.9
0
Max
3.1
0
Unit
V
Supply Voltage
Ground
VSS
V
VCC + 0.3
(Note 2)
Input High Voltage
Input Low Voltage
VIH
VIL
2.2
-
-
V
V
-0.3 (Note 3)
0.6
Notes:
1. TA = -40 to 85°C, otherwise specified.
2. Overshoot: VCC + 1.0 V in case of pulse width ≤ 20 ns.
3. Undershoot: -1.0 V in case of pulse width ≤ 20 ns.
4. Overshoot and undershoot are sampled, not 100% tested.
Capacitance (f= 1MHz, TA = 25°C)
Item
Symbol
CIN
Test Condition
VIN= 0 V
Min
Max
8
Unit
pF
Input Capacitance
-
-
Input/Output Capacitance
CIO
VIO= 0 V
10
pF
Note: Capacitance is sampled, not 100% tested.
DC and Operating Characteristics
Item
Symbol
ILI
Test Conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
µs
µs
Input Leakage Current
Output Leakage Current
VIN= VSS to VCC
-1
-1
-
-
1
1
ILO
CS#1s= VIH, CS2s= VIH or WE#= VIL, VIO= VSS to VCC
Cycle time = 1ms, 100% duty, IIO= 0 mA,
CS#1s ≤ 0.2 V, CS2s ≥ VCC ≤ 0.2 V or
VIN ≥ VCC-0.2 V
Cycle Time = Min, IIO = 0 mA, 100% duty, IIO = 0 mA,
CS#1s = VIL, CS2s = VIH, VIN=VIL or VIH
ICC1
-
30
7
mA
Average Operating Current
ICC2
-
-
35
mA
Output Low Voltage
Output High Voltage
VOL
VOH
IOL= 2.1 mA
IOH= -1.0 mA
-
-
-
0.4
-
V
V
2.4
CS#1s ≥ VCC-0.2 V, CS2s ≥ VCC-0.2 V,
Standby Current (CMOS)
Deep Power Down
ISB1
ISBD
-
-
-
-
80
20
µs
µs
Other inputs= VSS to VCC
CS2s ≤ 0.2V, Other inputs= VSS to VCC
Note: Typical values are tested at VCC= 2.9 V, TA= 25°C and not guaranteed.
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
61
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
TEST CONDITIONS
Table 19. Test Specifications
3.1 V
Test Condition
Output Load
66, 85
Unit
1 TTL gate
2.7 kΩ
Device
Under
Test
Output Load Capacitance, CL
(including jig capacitance)
30
pF
Input Rise and Fall Times
Input Pulse Levels
5
ns
V
C
L
6.2 kΩ
0.0–3.0
Input timing measurement
reference levels
1.5
1.5
V
V
Output timing measurement
reference levels
Note: Diodes are IN3064 or equivalent
Figure 10. Test Setup, VIO = 2.7 – 3.1 V
KEY TO SWITCHING WAVEFORMS
WAVEFORM
INPUTS
OUTPUTS
Steady
Changing from H to L
Changing from L to H
Don’t Care, Any Change Permitted
Does Not Apply
Changing, State Unknown
Center Line is High Impedance State (High Z)
KS000010-PAL
3.0 V
0.0 V
1.5 V
1.5 V
Input
Measurement Level
Output
Figure 11. Input Waveforms and Measurement Levels
62
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
FLASH AC CHARACTERISTICS
Hardware Reset (RESET#)
Parameter
JEDEC
Std
Description
All Speed Options
Unit
RESET# Pin Low (During Embedded Algorithms)
to Read Mode (See Note)
tReady
Max
Max
20
µs
RESET# Pin Low (NOT During Embedded
Algorithms) to Read Mode (See Note)
tReady
500
ns
tRP
tRH
tRPD
tRB
RESET# Pulse Width
Min
Min
Min
Min
500
50
20
0
ns
ns
µs
ns
Reset High Time Before Read (See Note)
RESET# Low to Standby Mode
RY/BY# Recovery Time
Note: Not 100% tested.
RY/BY#1
CE#f1,
CE#f2 (PDL129 only),
OE#
tRH
RESET#1
tRP
tReady
Reset Timings NOT during Embedded Algorithms
Reset Timings during Embedded Algorithms
tReady
RY/BY#1
tRB
CE#f1,
CE#f2 (PDL129 only),
OE#
RESET#1
tRP
Figure 12. Reset Timings
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
63
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
FLASH AC CHARACTERISTICS
Erase and Program Operations
Parameter
Speed
JEDEC
tAVAV
Std
tWC
tAS
Description
66
85
Unit
ns
Write Cycle Time (Note 1)
Address Setup Time
Min
Min
Min
Min
65
85
tAVWL
0
ns
tASO
tAH
Address Setup Time to OE# low during toggle bit polling
Address Hold Time
15
35
ns
tWLAX
ns
Address Hold Time From CE#1f or OE# high
during toggle bit polling
tAHT
Min
0
ns
tDVWH
tWHDX
tDS
tDH
Data Setup Time
Min
Min
Min
30
0
ns
ns
ns
Data Hold Time
tOEPH
Output Enable High during toggle bit polling
10
Read Recovery Time Before Write
(OE# High to WE# Low)
tGHWL
tGHWL
Min
0
ns
tWLEL
tELWL
tEHWH
tWHEH
tWLWH
tWHDL
tWS
tCS
WE# Setup Time (CE#f1 to WE#)
CE#f1 Setup Time
Min
Min
Min
Min
Min
Min
Min
Typ
0
0
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
µs
tWH
WE# Hold Time (CE#f1 to WE#)
CE#f1 Hold Time
0
tCH
0
tWP
Write Pulse Width
40
25
0
tWPH
tSR/W
Write Pulse Width High
Latency Between Read and Write Operations
tWHWH1
tWHWH1
tWHWH2
tWHWH1 Programming Operation (Note 2)
Word
6
Accelerated Programming Operation,
Word or Byte (Note 2)
tWHWH1
Typ
4
µs
tWHWH2 Sector Erase Operation (Note 2)
Typ
Min
Min
Max
0.5
50
0
sec
µs
tVCS
tRB
VCC Setup Time (Note 1)
Write Recovery Time from RY/BY#
Program/Erase Valid to RY/BY# Delay
ns
tBUSY
90
ns
Notes:
1. Not 100% tested.
2. See the “Flash Erase And Programming Performance” section for more information.
64
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
FLASH AC CHARACTERISTICS
Program Command Sequence (last two cycles)
Read Status Data (last two cycles)
tAS
PA
tWC
Addresses
555h
PA
PA
tAH
CE#1f
or CE#2f
(PDL129 only)
tCH
tGHWL
OE#
tWHWH1
tWP
WE#
tWPH
tCS
tDS
tDH
PD
DOUT
A0h
Status
Data
tBUSY
tRB
RY/BY#
V
CCf
tVCS
Notes:
1. PA = program address, PD = program data, DOUT is the true data at the program address.
2. Illustration shows device in word mode.
3. For PDL129 during CE# transitions the other CE# pin = VIH.
Figure 13. Program Operation Timings
VHH
VIL or VIH
WP#/ACC
VIL or VIH
tVHH
tVHH
Figure 14. Accelerated Program Timing Diagram
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
65
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
FLASH AC CHARACTERISTICS
Erase Command Sequence (last two cycles)
Read Status Data
VA
tAS
tWC
VA
Addresses
2AAh
SADD
555h for chip erase
tAH
CE#1f
(PDL129 only)
tGHWL
tCH
OE#
WE#
tWP
tWPH
tWHWH2
tCS
tDS
tDH
In
Data
Complete
55h
30h
Progress
10 for Chip Erase
tBUSY
tRB
RY/BY#
tVCS
VCC
f
Notes:
1. SADD = sector address (for Sector Erase), VA = Valid Address for reading status data (see “Flash Write Operation Status”.
2. For PDL129 during CE# transitions the other CE# pin = VIH.
Figure 15. Chip/Sector Erase Operation Timings
66
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
FLASH AC CHARACTERISTICS
tWC
Valid PA
tWC
tRC
tWC
Valid PA
tAH
Valid RA
Valid PA
Addresses
tCPH
tACC
tCE
CE#1f or
CE#2f (PDL129 only)
tCP
tOE
OE#
tOEH
tGHWL
tWP
WE#
Data
tDF
tWPH
tDS
tOH
tDH
Valid
Out
Valid
In
Valid
In
Valid
In
tSR/W
WE# Controlled Write Cycle
Read Cycle
CE#f Controlled Write Cycles
Figure 16. Back-to-back Read/Write Cycle Timings
tRC
Addresses
VA
tACC
tCE
VA
VA
CE#1f or
CE#2f (PDL129 only)
tCH
tOE
OE#
WE#
tOEH
tDF
tOH
High Z
High Z
DQ7
Valid Data
Complement
Complement
True
DQ6–DQ0
Status Data
True
Valid Data
Status Data
tBUSY
RY/BY#
Note: VA = Valid address. Illustration shows first status cycle after command sequence, last status read cycle, and array data
read cycle.
Figure 17. Data# Polling Timings (During Embedded Algorithms)
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
67
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
FLASH AC CHARACTERISTICS
tAHT
tAS
Addresses
tAHT
tASO
CE#1f or
CE#2f (PDL129 only)
tCEPH
tOEH
WE#
OE#
tOEPH
tDH
Valid Data
tOE
Valid
Status
Valid
Status
Valid
Status
DQ6/DQ2
Valid Data
(first read)
(second read)
(stops toggling)
RY/BY#
Note: VA = Valid address; not required for DQ6. Illustration shows first two status cycle after command sequence, last status read
cycle, and array data read cycle.
Figure 18. Toggle Bit Timings (During Embedded Algorithms)
Enter
Embedded
Erasing
Erase
Suspend
Enter Erase
Suspend Program
Erase
Resume
Erase
Erase Suspend
Read
Erase
Suspend
Program
Erase
Complete
WE#
Erase
Erase Suspend
Read
DQ6
DQ2
Note: DQ2 toggles only when read at an address within an erase-suspended sector. The system may use OE# or CE#f1 to
toggle DQ2 and DQ6.
Figure 19. DQ2 vs. DQ6
68
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
FLASH AC CHARACTERISTICS
Temporary Sector Unprotect
Parameter
JEDEC
Std
tVIDR
tVHH
Description
All Speed Options
Unit
ns
VID Rise and Fall Time (See Note)
VHH Rise and Fall Time (See Note)
Min
Min
500
250
ns
RESET# Setup Time for Temporary Sector
Unprotect
tRSP
Min
Min
4
4
µs
µs
RESET# Hold Time from RY/BY# High for
Temporary Sector Unprotect
tRRB
Note: Not 100% tested.
VID
VID
RESET#
VSS, VIL,
or VIH
VSS, VIL,
or VIH
tVIDR
tVIDR
Program or Erase Command Sequence
CE#1f or
CE#2f (PDL129 only)
WE#
tRRB
tRSP
RY/BY#
Figure 20. Temporary Sector Unprotect Timing Diagram
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
69
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
FLASH AC CHARACTERISTICS
VID
VIH
RESET#
SADD,
A6, A1, A0
Valid*
Valid*
Valid*
Status
Sector/Sector Block Protect or Unprotect
Verify
40h
Data
60h
60h
Sector/Sector Block Protect: 150 µs,
Sector/Sector Block Unprotect: 15 ms
1 µs
CE#1f or
CE#2f (PDL129 only)
WE#
OE#
1. For sector protect, A6 = 0, A1 = 1, A0 = 0. For sector unprotect, A6 = 1, A1 = 1, A0 = 0, SADD = Sector Address.
2. For PDL129 during CE#f1 transitions the other CE#f1 pin = VIH
.
Figure 21. Sector/Sector Block Protect and
Unprotect Timing Diagram
70
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
FLASH AC CHARACTERISTICS
Alternate CE#f1 Controlled Erase and Program Operations
Parameter
Speed
66
66
JEDEC
tAVAV
Std
tWC
tAS
tAH
tDS
tDH
Description
85
Unit
ns
Write Cycle Time (Note 1)
Address Setup Time
Address Hold Time
Data Setup Time
Data Hold Time
Min
Min
Min
Min
Min
85
tAVWL
tELAX
tDVEH
tEHDX
0
35
30
0
ns
ns
ns
ns
Read Recovery Time Before Write
(OE# High to WE# Low)
tGHEL
tGHEL
Min
0
ns
tWLEL
tEHWH
tELEH
tEHEL
tWS
tWH
tCP
WE# Setup Time
Min
Min
Min
Min
0
0
ns
ns
ns
ns
WE# Hold Time
CE#f1 Pulse Width
CE#f1 Pulse Width High
40
25
tCPH
Programming Operation
(Note 2)
tWHWH1
tWHWH1
Word
Typ
6
µs
Accelerated Programming Operation,
Word or Byte (Note 2)
tWHWH1
tWHWH2
Notes:
tWHWH1
tWHWH2
Typ
Typ
4
µs
Sector Erase Operation (Note 2)
0.4
sec
1. Not 100% tested.
2. See the “Flash Erase And Programming Performance” section for more information.
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
71
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
FLASH AC CHARACTERISTICS
555 for program
2AA for erase
PA for program
SADD for sector erase
555 for chip erase
Data# Polling
Addresses
PA
tWC
tWH
tAS
tAH
WE#
OE#
tGHEL
tWHWH1 or 2
tCP
CE#f1 or
CE#f2 (PDL129 only)
tWS
tCPH
tDS
tBUSY
tDH
DQ7#
DOUT
Data
tRH
A0 for program
55 for erase
PD for program
30 for sector erase
10 for chip erase
RESET#
RY/BY#
Notes:
1. Figure indicates last two bus cycles of a program or erase operation.
2. PA = program address, SADD = sector address, PD = program data.
3. DQ7# is the complement of the data written to the device. DOUT is the data written to the device.
Figure 22. Flash Alternate CE#f1 Controlled Write (Erase/Program) Operation Timings
72
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
PSRAM AC CHARACTERISTICS
CE#s Timing
Parameter
Test Setup
AllSpeeds
Unit
JEDEC
Std
Description
—
tCCR
CE#s Recover Time
—
Min
0
ns
CE#1ps
CE2ps
tCCR
tCCR
Figure 23. Timing Diagram for Alternating
Between Pseudo SRAM to Flash
VCC (Min)
VCC
Min. 0 ns
CS2s
Min. 200 µs
CS#1s
Normal Operation
Power Up Mode
Note: After VCC reaches VCC (MIn), wait 200 µs with CS#1s and CS2s high. The device will enter into normal operation.
Figure 24. Timing Waveform of Power-up
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
73
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
PSRAM AC CHARACTERISTICS
Functional Description
CS#1s
CS2s
H
OE#
X
WE#
X
LB#
X
UB#
X
I/O1-8
I/O9-16
Mode
Power
Standby
Deep Power Down
Standby
Active
H
X
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
High-Z High-Z
High-Z High-Z
High-Z High-Z
High-Z High-Z
High-Z High-Z
Deselected
L
X
X
X
X
Deselected
H
X
X
H
L
H
X
Deselected
H
H
H
L
H
Output Disabled
Output Disabled
Lower Byte Read
Upper Byte Read
Word Read
H
H
X
L
Active
H
H
L
H
L
DOUT
High-Z
DOUT
DIN
High-Z
DOUT
DOUT
High-Z
DIN
Active
H
L
H
H
L
Active
H
L
H
L
Active
H
X
L
L
H
L
Lower Byte Write
Word Write
Active
H
X
L
L
DIN
Active
Note: “X” means don’t care. (Must be low or high state).
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Item
Symbol
VIN, VOUT
VCC
Ratings
-0.2 to VCC + 0.3V
-0.2 to 3.6 V
1.0
Unit
V
Voltage on any pin relative to VSS
Voltage on VCC supply relative to VSS
Power Dissipation
V
PD
W
Storage Temperature
TSTG
-65 to 150
-40 to 85
°C
°C
Operating Temperature
TA
Note: Stresses greater than those listed under “Absolute Maximum Ratings” may cause permanent damage to the device.
Functional operation should be restricted to be used under recommended operating condition. Exposure to absolute maximum
rating conditions longer than 1 second may affect reliability.
74
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
PSRAM AC CHARACTERISTICS
CS
#1=V IL, UB or/and LB=VIL
CS2s
Standby
Mode
=VIH
CS#1s=VIH and CS2s
=VIH
Initial State
(Wait 200µs)
CS#1s
CS2s
=VIH
=VIH
Power On
Active
CS2s =VIL
CS2s =VIL
CS2s
Deep Power
Down Mode
CS#1s
=VIH,
=VIH
Figure 25. Standby Mode State Machines
Standby Mode Characteristic
Power Mode
Standby
Memory Cell Data
Standby Current (µA)
Wait Time (µs)
Valid
80
20
0
Deep Power Down
Invalid
200
AC Characteristics (VCC= 2.7-3.1 V, TA= -40 to 85°C)
Speed Bins
66/85 ns
Parameter List
Symbol
Units
Min
Max
Read Cycle Time
tRC
tAA
70
-
-
70
70
35
70
-
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
Address Access Time
Chip Select to Output
Output Enable to Valid Output
UB#, LB# Access Time
tCO
tOE
tBA
-
-
-
Chip Select to Low-Z Output
Read
tLZ
10
10
5
UB#, LB# Enable to Low-Z Output
tBLZ
tOLZ
tHZ
-
Output Enable to Low-Z Output
Chip Disable to High-Z Output
UB#, LB# Disable to High-Z Output
Output Disable to High-Z Output
Output Hold from Address Change
Write Cycle Time
-
0
25
25
25
-
tBHZ
tOHZ
tOH
tWC
tCW
tAS
0
0
5
70
60
0
-
Chip Select to End of Write
Address Set-up Time
-
-
Address Valid to End of Write
UB#, LB# Valid to End of Write
tAW
tBW
60
60
-
-
55
(Note 1)
Write Write Pulse Width
tWP
-
ns
Write Recovery Time
tWR
tWHZ
tDW
tDH
0
0
-
25
-
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
Write to Output High-Z
Data to Write Time Overlap
Data Hold from Write Time
End Write to Output Low-Z
30
0
-
tOW
5
-
tWP (min)= 70 ns for continuous write operation over 50 times.
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
75
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
TIMING DIAGRAMS
tRC
Address
tAA
tOH
Data Valid
Data Out
Previous Data Valid
Figure 26. Timing Waveform of Read Cycle 1
tRC
Address
CS#1s
tAA
tCO
tOH
tHZ
tBA
tOE
#, LB#
OE#
UB
tBHZ
tOLZ
tBLZ
tLZ
tOHZ
High-Z
Data out
Data Valid
Figure 27. Timing Waveform of Read Cycle 2
Notes:
1. tHZ and tOZ are defined as the time at which the outputs
achieve the open circuit conditions and are not
referenced to output voltage levels.
3. tOE (Max) is met only when OE# becomes enabled after tAA
(Max).
4. If invalid address signals shorter than min. tRC are
continuously repeated for over 4 us, the device needs a
normal read timing (tRC) or needs to sustain standby state
for min. tRC at least once in every 4 us.
2. At any given temperature and voltage condition, tHZ (Max) is
less than tLZ (Min) both for a given device and from device
interconnection.
76
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
TIMING DIAGRAMS
tWC
Address
CS#1s
tWR(4)
tCW(2)
tAW
tBW
LB#
UB#,
tWP(1)
WE#
Data in
Data out
tAS(3)
tDW
tDH
High-Z
High-Z
Data Valid
tWHZ
tOW
Data Undefined
Figure 28. Timing Waveform of Write Cycle 1
tWC
Address
CS#1s
tWR(4)
tCW(2)
tAW
tBW
UB#, LB#
WE#
tAS(3)
tWP(1)
tDH
tDW
Data Valid
Data in
High-Z
Data out
High-Z
Figure 29. Timing Waveform of Write Cycle 2
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
77
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
TIMING DIAGRAMS
tWC
Address
tWR(4)
tCW(2)
CS#1s
tAW
tBW
UB#, LB#
tAS(3)
tWP(1)
WE#
tDH
tDW
Data Valid
Data in
High-Z
Data out
High-Z
Notes: Write Cycle
1. A write occurs during the overlap (tWP) of low CS#1s and low WE#. A write begins when CS#1s goes low and WE# goes low
with asserting UB# or LB# for single byte operation or simultaneously asserting UB# and LB# for double byte operation. A
write ends at the earliest transition when CS#1s goes high and WE# goes high. The tWP is measured from the beginning of
write to the end of write.
2. tCW is measured from the CS#1s going low to the end of write.
3. tAS is measured from the address valid to the beginning of write.
4. tWR is measured from the end of write to the address change. tWR is applied in case a write ends with CS#1s or WE# going high.
200µs
0.5µs
CS2s
Wake up
Normal Operation
Suspend
Normal Operation
MODE
Deep Power Down Mode
CS#1s
Notes: Deep Power Down Mode
1. When you toggle CS2s pin low, the device gets into the Deep Power Down mode after 0.5 ms suspend period.
2. To return to normal operation, the device needs Wake-up period.
3. Wake Up sequence is just the same as Power Up sequence.
Figure 30. Timing Waveform of Write Cycle 3
78
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
ERASE AND PROGRAMMING PERFORMANCE
Parameter
Typ (Note 1) Max (Note 2)
Unit
sec
sec
Comments
Sector Erase Time
Chip Erase Time
0.4
5
Excludes 00h programming
prior to erasure (Note 4)
108
Excludes system level
overhead (Note 5)
Word Program Time
6
210
µs
Accelerated Word Program Time
Chip Program Time (Note 3)
Notes:
4
120
200
µs
50
sec
1. Typical program and erase times assume the following conditions: 25°C, 3.0 V VCC, 1,000,000 cycles. Additionally,
programming typicals assume checkerboard pattern. All values are subject to change.
2. Under worst case conditions of 90°C, VCC = 2.7 V, 1,000,000 cycles. All values are subject to change.
3. The typical chip programming time is considerably less than the maximum chip programming time listed, since most bytes
program faster than the maximum program times listed.
4. In the pre-programming step of the Embedded Erase algorithm, all bytes are programmed to 00h before erasure.
5. System-level overhead is the time required to execute the two- or four-bus-cycle sequence for the program command. See Tables
Table 16 for further information on command definitions.
6. The device has a minimum erase and program cycle endurance of 1,000,000 cycles.
LATCHUP CHARACTERISTICS
Description
Min
Max
Input voltage with respect to VSS on all pins except I/O pins
(including A9, OE#, and RESET#)
–1.0 V
12.5 V
Input voltage with respect to VSS on all I/O pins
VCC Current
–1.0 V
VCC + 1.0 V
+100 mA
–100 mA
Note: Includes all pins except VCC. Test conditions: VCC = 3.0 V, one pin at a time.
PACKAGE PIN CAPACITANCE
Parameter
Symbol
Parameter Description
Input Capacitance
Test Setup
VIN = 0
Typ
11
Max
14
Unit
pF
CIN
COUT
CIN2
Output Capacitance
VOUT = 0
VIN = 0
12
16
pF
Control Pin Capacitance
WP#/ACC Pin Capacitance
14
16
pF
CIN3
VIN = 0
17
20
pF
Notes:
1. Sampled, not 100% tested.
2. Test conditions TA = 25°C, f = 1.0 MHz.
FLASH DATA RETENTION
Parameter Description
Test Conditions
150°C
Min
10
Unit
Years
Years
Minimum Pattern Data Retention Time
125°C
20
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
79
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
GENERAL DESCRIPTION (LV640M)
The Am29LV640MH is a 64 Mbit, 3.0 volt single power
supply flash memory device organized as 4,194,304
words. The device has an 8-bit/16-bit bus and can be
programmed either in the host system or in standard
EPROM programmers.
operations in any combination of sectors of memory.
This can be achieved in-system or via programming
equipment.
The Erase Suspend/Erase Resume feature allows
the host system to pause an erase operation in a given
sector to read or program any other sector and then
complete the erase operation. The Program Sus-
pend/Program Resume feature enables the host sys-
tem to pause a program operation in a given sector to
read any other sector and then complete the program
operation.
An access time of 110 ns is available. Each device re-
quires only a single 3.0 volt power supply for both
read and write functions. In addition to a VCC input, a
high-voltage accelerated program (ACC) feature pro-
vides shorter programming times through increased
current on the WP#/ACC input. This feature is in-
tended to facilitate factory throughput during system
production, but may also be used in the field if desired.
The hardware RESET# pin terminates any operation
in progress and resets the device, after which it is then
ready for a new operation. The RESET# pin may be
tied to the system reset circuitry. A system reset would
thus also reset the device, enabling the host system to
read boot-up firmware from the Flash memory device.
The device is entirely command set compatible with
the JEDEC single-power-supply Flash standard.
Commands are written to the device using standard
microprocessor write timing. Write cycles also inter-
nally latch addresses and data needed for the pro-
gramming and erase operations.
The device reduces power consumption in the
standby mode when it detects specific voltage levels
on CE# and RESET#, or when addresses have been
stable for a specified period of time.
The sector erase architecture allows memory sec-
tors to be erased and reprogrammed without affecting
the data contents of other sectors. The device is fully
erased when shipped from the factory.
The Write Protect (WP#) feature protects the first or
last sector by asserting a logic low on the WP#/ACC
pin. The protected sector will still be protected even
during accelerated programming.
Device programming and erasure are initiated through
command sequences. Once a program or erase oper-
ation has begun, the host system need only poll the
DQ7 (Data# Polling) or DQ6 (toggle) status bits or
monitor the Ready/Busy# (RY/BY#) output to deter-
mine whether the operation is complete. To facilitate
programming, an Unlock Bypass mode reduces com-
mand sequence overhead by requiring only two write
cycles to program data instead of four.
The SecSi™ (Secured Silicon) Sector provides a
128-word area for code or data that can be perma-
nently protected. Once this sector is protected, no fur-
ther changes within the sector can occur.
AMD MirrorBit flash technology combines years of
Flash memory manufacturing experience to produce
the highest levels of quality, reliability and cost effec-
tiveness. The device electrically erases all bits within a
sector simultaneously via hot-hole assisted erase. The
data is programmed using hot electron injection.
Hardware data protection measures include a low
VCC detector that automatically inhibits write opera-
tions during power transitions. The hardware sector
protection feature disables both program and erase
80
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
DEVICE BUS OPERATIONS
This section describes the requirements and use of
the device bus operations, which are initiated through
the internal command register. The command register
itself does not occupy any addressable memory loca-
tion. The register is a latch used to store the com-
mands, along with the address and data information
needed to execute the command. The contents of the
register serve as inputs to the internal state machine.
The state machine outputs dictate the function of the
device. Table 1 lists the device bus operations, the in-
puts and control levels they require, and the resulting
output. The following subsections describe each of
these operations in further detail.
Table 1. Device Bus Operations
DQ0–
DQ7
DQ8–DQ
15
Addresses
(Note 2)
Operation
CE#
OE#
L
WE#
RESET#
WP#
X
ACC
X
Read
L
L
L
H
L
L
H
H
H
AIN
AIN
AIN
DOUT
DOUT
Write (Program/Erase)
Accelerated Program
H
(Note 3)
(Note 3)
X
(Note 4) (Note 4)
(Note 4) (Note 4)
H
VHH
VCC
0.3 V
VCC
0.3 V
Standby
X
X
X
H
X
High-Z
High-Z
Output Disable
Reset
L
H
X
H
X
H
L
X
X
X
X
X
X
High-Z
High-Z
High-Z
High-Z
X
SA, A6 =L,
A3=L, A2=L,
A1=H, A0=L
Sector Group Protect
(Note 2)
L
H
L
VID
H
X
(Note 4)
(Note 4)
X
X
SA, A6=H,
A3=L, A2=L,
A1=H, A0=L
Sector Group Unprotect
(Note 2)
L
H
X
L
VID
VID
H
H
X
X
Temporary Sector Group
Unprotect
X
X
AIN
(Note 4) (Note 4)
Legend: L = Logic Low = VIL, H = Logic High = VIH, VID = 11.5–12.5 V, VHH = 11.5–12.5 V, X = Don’t Care, SA = Sector Address,
AIN = Address In, DIN = Data In, DOUT = Data Out
Notes:
1. Addresses are A21:A0 in word mode.
2. The sector protect and sector unprotect functions may also be implemented via programming equipment. See the “Sector Group
Protection and Unprotection” section.
3. If WP# = VIL, the first or last sector remains protected. If WP# = VIH, the first or last sector will be protected or unprotected as
determined by the method described in “Sector Group Protection and Unprotection”. All sectors are unprotected when shipped
from the factory (The SecSi Sector may be factory protected depending on version ordered.)
4. DIN or DOUT as required by command sequence, data polling, or sector protect algorithm (see Figure 2).
Standard microprocessor read cycles that assert valid
Requirements for Reading Array Data
addresses on the device address inputs produce valid
To read array data from the outputs, the system must
data on the device data outputs. The device remains
drive the CE# and OE# pins to VIL. CE# is the power
enabled for read access until the command register
control and selects the device. OE# is the output con-
contents are altered.
trol and gates array data to the output pins. WE#
should remain at VIH.
See “Reading Array Data” for more information. Refer
to the AC Read-Only Operations table for timing speci-
fications and to Figure 14 for the timing diagram. Refer
to the DC Characteristics table for the active current
specification on reading array data.
The internal state machine is set for reading array data
upon device power-up, or after a hardware reset. This
ensures that no spurious alteration of the memory
content occurs during the power transition. No com-
mand is necessary in this mode to obtain array data.
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
81
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
If the system asserts VHH on this pin, the device auto-
Page Mode Read
matically enters the aforementioned Unlock Bypass
mode, temporarily unprotects any protected sectors,
and uses the higher voltage on the pin to reduce the
time required for program operations. The system
would use a two-cycle program command sequence
as required by the Unlock Bypass mode. Removing
VHH from the WP#/ACC pin returns the device to nor-
mal operation. Note that the WP#/ACC pin must not be
at VHH for operations other than accelerated program-
ming, or device damage may result. In addition, no ex-
ternal pullup is necessary since the WP#/ACC pin has
internal pullup to VCC.
The device is capable of fast page mode read and is
compatible with the page mode Mask ROM read oper-
ation. This mode provides faster read access speed
for random locations within a page. The page size of
the device is 4 words/8 bytes. The appropriate page is
selected by the higher address bits A(max)–A2. Ad-
dress bits A1–A0 in word mode (A1–A-1 in byte mode)
determine the specific word within a page. This is an
asynchronous operation; the microprocessor supplies
the specific word location.
The random or initial page access is equal to tACC or
tCE and subsequent page read accesses (as long as
the locations specified by the microprocessor falls
within that page) is equivalent to tPACC. When CE# is
deasserted and reasserted for a subsequent access,
the access time is tACC or tCE. Fast page mode ac-
cesses are obtained by keeping the “read-page ad-
dresses” constant and changing the “intra-read page”
addresses.
Autoselect Functions
If the system writes the autoselect command se-
quence, the device enters the autoselect mode. The
system can then read autoselect codes from the inter-
nal register (which is separate from the memory array)
on DQ7–DQ0. Standard read cycle timings apply in
this mode. Refer to the Autoselect Mode and Autose-
lect Command Sequence sections for more informa-
tion.
Writing Commands/Command Sequences
To write a command or command sequence (which in-
cludes programming data to the device and erasing
sectors of memory), the system must drive WE# and
CE# to VIL, and OE# to VIH.
Standby Mode
When the system is not reading or writing to the de-
vice, it can place the device in the standby mode. In
this mode, current consumption is greatly reduced,
and the outputs are placed in the high impedance
state, independent of the OE# input.
The device features an Unlock Bypass mode to facili-
tate faster programming. Once the device enters the
Unlock Bypass mode, only two write cycles are re-
quired to program a word or byte, instead of four. The
“Word/Byte Program Command Sequence” section
has details on programming data to the device using
both standard and Unlock Bypass command se-
quences.
The device enters the CMOS standby mode when the
CE# and RESET# pins are both held at VIO 0.3 V.
(Note that this is a more restricted voltage range than
VIH.) If CE# and RESET# are held at VIH, but not within
VIO 0.3 V, the device will be in the standby mode, but
the standby current will be greater. The device re-
quires standard access time (tCE) for read access
when the device is in either of these standby modes,
before it is ready to read data.
An erase operation can erase one sector, multiple sec-
tors, or the entire device. Table 2 indicates the address
space that each sector occupies.
Refer to the DC Characteristics table for the active
current specification for the write mode. The AC Char-
acteristics section contains timing specification tables
and timing diagrams for write operations.
If the device is deselected during erasure or program-
ming, the device draws active current until the
operation is completed.
Refer to the DC Characteristics table for the standby
current specification.
Write Buffer
Write Buffer Programming allows the system to write a
maximum of 16 words/32 bytes in one programming
operation. This results in faster effective programming
time than the standard programming algorithms. See
“Write Buffer” for more information.
Automatic Sleep Mode
The automatic sleep mode minimizes Flash device en-
ergy consumption. The device automatically enables
this mode when addresses remain stable for tACC
+
30 ns. The automatic sleep mode is independent of
the CE#, WE#, and OE# control signals. Standard ad-
dress access timings provide new data when ad-
dresses are changed. While in sleep mode, output
data is latched and always available to the system.
Accelerated Program Operation
The device offers accelerated program operations
through the ACC function. This is one of two functions
provided by the WP#/ACC pin. This function is prima-
rily intended to allow faster manufacturing throughput
at the factory.
82
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
Refer to the DC Characteristics table for the automatic
sleep mode current specification.
Current is reduced for the duration of the RESET#
pulse. When RESET# is held at VSS 0.3 V, the device
draws CMOS standby current (ICC4). If RESET# is held
at VIL but not within VSS 0.3 V, the standby current will
be greater.
RESET#: Hardware Reset Pin
The RESET# pin provides a hardware method of re-
setting the device to reading array data. When the RE-
SET# pin is driven low for at least a period of tRP, the
device immediately terminates any operation in
progress, tristates all output pins, and ignores all
read/write commands for the duration of the RESET#
pulse. The device also resets the internal state ma-
chine to reading array data. The operation that was in-
terrupted should be reinitiated once the device is
ready to accept another command sequence, to en-
sure data integrity.
The RESET# pin may be tied to the system reset cir-
cuitry. A system reset would thus also reset the Flash
memory, enabling the system to read the boot-up firm-
ware from the Flash memory.
Refer to the AC Characteristics tables for RESET# pa-
rameters and to Figure 16 for the timing diagram.
Output Disable Mode
When the OE# input is at VIH, output from the device is
disabled. The output pins are placed in the high
impedance state.
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
83
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
Table 2. Sector Address Table
16-bit
Sector Size
Address Range
(in hexadecimal)
Sector
SA0
A21–A15
(Kwords)
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
000000–007FFF
008000–00FFFF
010000–017FFF
018000–01FFFF
020000–027FFF
028000–02FFFF
030000–037FFF
038000–03FFFF
040000–047FFF
048000–04FFFF
050000–057FFF
058000–05FFFF
060000–067FFF
068000–06FFFF
070000–077FFF
078000–07FFFF
080000–087FFF
088000–08FFFF
090000–097FFF
098000–09FFFF
0A0000–0A7FFF
0A8000–0AFFFF
0B0000–0B7FFF
0B8000–0BFFFF
0C0000–0C7FFF
0C8000–0CFFFF
0D0000–0D7FFF
0D8000–0DFFFF
0E0000–0E7FFF
0E8000–0EFFFF
0F0000–0F7FFF
0F8000–0FFFFF
100000–107FFF
108000–10FFFF
110000–117FFF
118000–11FFFF
120000–127FFF
128000–12FFFF
130000–137FFF
138000–13FFFF
140000–147FFF
148000–14FFFF
150000–157FFF
158000–15FFFF
SA1
SA2
SA3
SA4
SA5
SA6
SA7
SA8
SA9
SA10
SA11
SA12
SA13
SA14
SA15
SA16
SA17
SA18
SA19
SA20
SA21
SA22
SA23
SA24
SA25
SA26
SA27
SA28
SA29
SA30
SA31
SA32
SA33
SA34
SA35
SA36
SA37
SA38
SA39
SA40
SA41
SA42
SA43
84
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
Table 2. Sector Address Table (Continued)
16-bit
Sector Size
Address Range
(in hexadecimal)
Sector
SA44
SA45
SA46
SA47
SA48
SA49
SA50
SA51
SA52
SA53
SA54
SA55
SA56
SA57
SA58
SA59
SA60
SA61
SA62
SA63
SA64
SA65
SA66
SA67
SA68
SA69
SA70
SA71
SA72
SA73
SA74
SA75
SA76
SA77
SA78
SA79
SA80
SA81
SA82
SA83
SA84
SA85
SA86
SA87
SA88
A21–A15
(Kwords)
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
160000–167FFF
168000–16FFFF
170000–177FFF
178000–17FFFF
180000–187FFF
188000–18FFFF
190000–197FFF
198000–19FFFF
1A0000–1A7FFF
1A8000–1AFFFF
1B0000–1B7FFF
1B8000–1BFFFF
1C0000–1C7FFF
1C8000–1CFFFF
1D0000–1D7FFF
1D8000–1DFFFF
1E0000–1E7FFF
1E8000–1EFFFF
1F0000–1F7FFF
1F8000–1FFFFF
200000–207FFF
208000–20FFFF
210000–217FFF
218000–21FFFF
220000–227FFF
228000–22FFFF
230000–237FFF
238000–23FFFF
240000–247FFF
248000–24FFFF
250000–257FFF
258000–25FFFF
260000–267FFF
268000–26FFFF
270000–277FFF
278000–27FFFF
280000–287FFF
288000–28FFFF
290000–297FFF
298000–29FFFF
2A0000–2A7FFF
2A8000–2AFFFF
2B0000–2B7FFF
2B8000–2BFFFF
2C0000–2C7FFF
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
85
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
Table 2. Sector Address Table (Continued)
16-bit
Sector Size
Address Range
(in hexadecimal)
Sector
SA89
A21–A15
(Kwords)
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
2C8000–2CFFFF
2D0000–2D7FFF
2D8000–2DFFFF
2E0000–2E7FFF
2E8000–2EFFFF
2F0000–2F7FFF
2F8000–2FFFFF
300000–307FFF
308000–30FFFF
310000–317FFF
318000–31FFFF
320000–327FFF
328000–32FFFF
330000–337FFF
338000–33FFFF
340000–347FFF
348000–34FFFF
350000–357FFF
358000–35FFFF
360000–367FFF
368000–36FFFF
370000–377FFF
378000–37FFFF
380000–387FFF
388000–38FFFF
390000–397FFF
398000–39FFFF
3A0000–3A7FFF
3A8000–3AFFFF
3B0000–3B7FFF
3B8000–3BFFFF
3C0000–3C7FFF
3C8000–3CFFFF
3D0000–3D7FFF
3D8000–3DFFFF
3E0000–3E7FFF
3E8000–3EFFFF
3F0000–3F7FFF
3F8000–3FFFFF
SA90
SA91
SA92
SA93
SA94
SA95
SA96
SA97
SA98
SA99
SA100
SA101
SA102
SA103
SA104
SA105
SA106
SA107
SA108
SA109
SA110
SA111
SA112
SA113
SA114
SA115
SA116
SA117
SA118
SA119
SA120
SA121
SA122
SA123
SA124
SA125
SA126
SA127
86
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
Sector Group Protection and
Unprotection
Sector Group
SA12–SA15
SA16–SA19
SA20–SA23
SA24–SA27
SA28–SA31
SA32–SA35
SA36–SA39
SA40–SA43
SA44–SA47
SA48–SA51
SA52–SA55
SA56–SA59
SA60–SA63
SA64–SA67
SA68–SA71
SA72–SA75
SA76–SA79
SA80–SA83
SA84–SA87
SA88–SA91
SA92–SA95
SA96–SA99
SA100–SA103
SA104–SA107
SA108–SA111
SA112–SA115
SA116–SA119
SA120–SA123
SA124
A21–A15
00011xx
00100xx
00101xx
00110xx
00111xx
01000xx
01001xx
01010xx
01011xx
01100xx
01101xx
01110xx
01111xx
10000xx
10001xx
10010xx
10011xx
10100xx
10101xx
10110xx
10111xx
11000xx
11001xx
11010xx
11011xx
11100xx
11101xx
11110xx
1111100
1111101
1111110
1111111
The hardware sector group protection feature disables
both program and erase operations in any sector
group. In this device, a sector group consists of four
adjacent sectors that are protected or unprotected at
the same time (see Table 4). The hardware sector
group unprotection feature re-enables both program
and erase operations in previously protected sector
groups. Sector group protection/unprotection can be
implemented via two methods.
Sector protection/unprotection requires VID on the RE-
SET# pin only, and can be implemented either in-sys-
tem or via programming equipment. Figure 2 shows
the algorithms and Figure 24 shows the timing dia-
gram. This method uses standard microprocessor bus
cycle timing. For sector group unprotect, all unpro-
tected sector groups must first be protected prior to
the first sector group unprotect write cycle.
The device is shipped with all sector groups unpro-
tected. AMD offers the option of programming and pro-
tecting sector groups at its factory prior to shipping the
device through AMD’s ExpressFlash™ Service. Con-
tact an AMD representative for details.
It is possible to determine whether a sector group is
protected or unprotected. See the Autoselect Mode
section for details.
Table 3. Sector Group Protection/Unprotection
Address Table
Sector Group
SA0
A21–A15
0000000
0000001
0000010
0000011
00001xx
00010xx
SA1
SA2
SA3
SA125
SA4–SA7
SA8–SA11
SA126
SA127
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
87
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
Write Protect (WP#)
The Write Protect function provides a hardware
method of protecting the first or last sector without
using VID. Write Protect is one of two functions pro-
vided by the WP#/ACC input.
START
If the system asserts VIL on the WP#/ACC pin, the de-
vice disables program and erase functions in the first
or last sector independently of whether those sectors
were protected or unprotected using the method de-
scribed in “Sector Group Protection and Unprotection”.
Note that if WP#/ACC is at VIL when the device is in
the standby mode, the maximum input load current is
increased. See the table in “DC Characteristics”.
RESET# = VID
(Note 1)
Perform Erase or
Program Operations
RESET# = VIH
If the system asserts VIH on the WP#/ACC pin, the de-
vice reverts to whether the first or last sector was pre-
viously set to be protected or unprotected using the
method described in “Sector Group Protection and
Unprotection”. Note: No external pullup is necessary
Temporary Sector
Group Unprotect
Completed (Note 2)
since the WP#/ACC pin has internal pullup to VCC
.
Temporary Sector Group Unprotect
(Note: In this device, a sector group consists of four adjacent
sectors that are protected or unprotected at the same time
(see Table 4).
Notes:
1. All protected sector groups unprotected (If WP# = VIL,
the first or last sector will remain protected).
2. All previously protected sector groups are protected
once again.
This feature allows temporary unprotection of previ-
ously protected sector groups to change data in-sys-
tem. The Sector Group Unprotect mode is activated by
setting the RESET# pin to VID. During this mode, for-
merly protected sector groups can be programmed or
erased by selecting the sector group addresses. Once
VID is removed from the RESET# pin, all the previously
protected sector groups are protected again. Figure 1
shows the algorithm, and Figure 23 shows the timing
diagrams, for this feature.
Figure 1. Temporary Sector Group
Unprotect Operation
88
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
START
START
PLSCNT = 1
PLSCNT = 1
Protect all sector
groups: The indicated
portion of the sector
group protect algorithm
must be performed for all
unprotected sector
groups prior to issuing
the first sector group
unprotect address
RESET# = VID
RESET# = VID
Wait 1 µs
Wait 1 µs
Temporary Sector
Group Unprotect
Mode
Temporary Sector
Group Unprotect
Mode
No
No
First Write
Cycle = 60h?
First Write
Cycle = 60h?
Yes
Yes
Set up sector
group address
All sector
groups
No
protected?
Yes
Sector Group Protect:
Write 60h to sector
group address with
A6–A0 = 0xx0010
Set up first sector
group address
Sector Group
Unprotect:
Wait 150 µs
Write 60h to sector
group address with
A6–A0 = 1xx0010
Verify Sector Group
Protect: Write 40h
to sector group
address with
A6–A0 = 0xx0010
Reset
PLSCNT = 1
Increment
PLSCNT
Wait 15 ms
Verify Sector Group
Unprotect: Write
40h to sector group
address with
Read from
sector group address
with A6–A0
= 0xx0010
Increment
PLSCNT
A6–A0 = 1xx0010
No
No
PLSCNT
= 25?
Read from
sector group
address with
Data = 01h?
Yes
A6–A0 = 1xx0010
No
Yes
Set up
next sector group
address
Protect
another
sector group?
Yes
No
PLSCNT
= 1000?
Data = 00h?
Yes
Device failed
No
Yes
Remove VID
from RESET#
Last sector
group
verified?
No
Device failed
Write reset
command
Yes
Remove VID
from RESET#
Sector Group
Unprotect
Sector Group
Protect
Sector Group
Protect complete
Write reset
command
Algorithm
Algorithm
Sector Group
Unprotect complete
Figure 2. In-System Sector Group Protect/Unprotect Algorithms
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
89
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
ods, in addition to the standard programming com-
mand sequence. See Command Definitions.
SecSi (Secured Silicon) Sector Flash
Memory Region
Programming and protecting the SecSi Sector must be
used with caution since, once protected, there is no
procedure available for unprotecting the SecSi Sector
area and none of the bits in the SecSi Sector memory
space can be modified in any way.
The SecSi (Secured Silicon) Sector feature provides a
Flash memory region that enables permanent part
identification through an Electronic Serial Number
(ESN). The SecSi Sector is 128 words in length, and
uses a SecSi Sector Indicator Bit (DQ7) to indicate
whether or not the SecSi Sector is locked when
shipped from the factory. This bit is permanently set at
the factory and cannot be changed, which prevents
cloning of a factory locked part. This ensures the secu-
rity of the ESN once the product is shipped to the field.
The SecSi Sector area can be protected using one of
the following procedures:
■ Write the three-cycle Enter SecSi Sector Region
command sequence, and then follow the in-system
sector protect algorithm as shown in Figure 2, ex-
cept that RESET# may be at either VIH or VID. This
allows in-system protection of the SecSi Sector
without raising any device pin to a high voltage.
Note that this method is only applicable to the SecSi
Sector.
AMD offers the device with the SecSi Sector either
factory locked or customer lockable. The fac-
tory-locked version is always protected when shipped
from the factory, and has the SecSi (Secured Silicon)
Sector Indicator Bit permanently set to a “1.” The cus-
tomer-lockable version is shipped with the SecSi Sec-
tor unprotected, allowing customers to program the
sector after receiving the device. The customer-lock-
able version also has the SecSi Sector Indicator Bit
permanently set to a “0.” Thus, the SecSi Sector Indi-
cator Bit prevents customer-lockable devices from
being used to replace devices that are factory locked.
■ To verify the protect/unprotect status of the SecSi
Sector, follow the algorithm shown in Figure 3.
Once the SecSi Sector is programmed, locked and
verified, the system must write the Exit SecSi Sector
Region command sequence to return to reading and
writing within the remainder of the array.
The SecSi sector address space in this device is allo-
cated as follows:
Table 4. SecSi Sector Contents
START
SecSi Sector
Address
Range
Standard
Factory
Locked
If data = 00h,
RESET# =
ExpressFlash
Factory Locked
Customer
Lockable
SecSi Sector is
VIH or VID
x16
unprotected.
If data = 01h,
000000h–
000007h
ESN or determined
by customer
ESN
Determined by
customer
SecSi Sector is
protected.
Wait 1 µs
000008h–
00007Fh
Determined
by customer
Unavailable
Write 60h to
any address
The system accesses the SecSi Sector through a
command sequence (see “Enter SecSi Sector/Exit
SecSi Sector Command Sequence”). After the system
has written the Enter SecSi Sector command se-
quence, it may read the SecSi Sector by using the ad-
dresses normally occupied by the first sector (SA0).
This mode of operation continues until the system is-
sues the Exit SecSi Sector command sequence, or
until power is removed from the device. On power-up,
or following a hardware reset, the device reverts to
sending commands to sector SA0.
Remove VIH or VID
from RESET#
Write 40h to SecSi
Sector address
Write reset
with A6 = 0,
command
A1 = 1, A0 = 0
SecSi Sector
Read from SecSi
Protect Verify
Sector address
complete
with A6 = 0,
A1 = 1, A0 = 0
Customer Lockable: SecSi Sector NOT
Programmed or Protected At the Factory
As an alternative to the factory-locked version, the de-
vice may be ordered such that the customer may pro-
gram and protect the 128-word SecSi sector. See
Table 5 for SecSi Sector addressing.
Figure 3. SecSi Sector Protect Verify
Hardware Data Protection
The system may program the SecSi Sector using the
write-buffer, accelerated and/or unlock bypass meth-
The command sequence requirement of unlock cycles
for programming or erasing provides data protection
against inadvertent writes (refer to Tables 10 and 11
90
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
for command definitions). In addition, the following
Write Pulse “Glitch” Protection
hardware data protection measures prevent accidental
erasure or programming, which might otherwise be
caused by spurious system level signals during VCC
power-up and power-down transitions, or from system
noise.
Noise pulses of less than 5 ns (typical) on OE#, CE#
or WE# do not initiate a write cycle.
Logical Inhibit
Write cycles are inhibited by holding any one of OE# =
VIL, CE# = VIH or WE# = VIH. To initiate a write cycle,
CE# and WE# must be a logical zero while OE# is a
logical one.
Low VCC Write Inhibit
When VCC is less than VLKO, the device does not ac-
cept any write cycles. This protects data during VCC
power-up and power-down. The command register
and all internal program/erase circuits are disabled,
and the device resets to the read mode. Subsequent
writes are ignored until VCC is greater than VLKO. The
system must provide the proper signals to the control
pins to prevent unintentional writes when VCC is
Power-Up Write Inhibit
If WE# = CE# = VIL and OE# = VIH during power up,
the device does not accept commands on the rising
edge of WE#. The internal state machine is automati-
cally reset to the read mode on power-up.
greater than VLKO
.
COMMON FLASH MEMORY INTERFACE (CFI)
The Common Flash Interface (CFI) specification out-
lines device and host system software interrogation
handshake, which allows specific vendor-specified
software algorithms to be used for entire families of
devices. Software support can then be device-inde-
pendent, JEDEC ID-independent, and forward- and
backward-compatible for the specified flash device
families. Flash vendors can standardize their existing
interfaces for long-term compatibility.
The system can also write the CFI query command
when the device is in the autoselect mode. The device
enters the CFI query mode, and the system can read
CFI data at the addresses given in Tables 6–9. The
system must write the reset command to return the
device to reading array data.
For further information, please refer to the CFI Specifi-
cation and CFI Publication 100, available via the World
Wide Web at http://www.amd.com/flash/cfi. Alterna-
tively, contact an AMD representative for copies of
these documents.
This device enters the CFI Query mode when the sys-
tem writes the CFI Query command, 98h, to address
55h, any time the device is ready to read array data.
The system can read CFI information at the addresses
given in Tables 6–9. To terminate reading CFI data,
the system must write the reset command.
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
91
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
Table 5. CFI Query Identification String
Addresses
(x16)
Data
Description
10h
11h
12h
0051h
0052h
0059h
Query Unique ASCII string “QRY”
13h
14h
0002h
0000h
Primary OEM Command Set
15h
16h
0040h
0000h
Address for Primary Extended Table
17h
18h
0000h
0000h
Alternate OEM Command Set (00h = none exists)
Address for Alternate OEM Extended Table (00h = none exists)
19h
1Ah
0000h
0000h
92
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
Table 6. System Interface String
Addresses
(x16)
Data
Description
VCC Min. (write/erase)
D7–D4: volt, D3–D0: 100 millivolt
1Bh
1Ch
0027h
VCC Max. (write/erase)
D7–D4: volt, D3–D0: 100 millivolt
0036h
1Dh
1Eh
1Fh
20h
21h
22h
23h
24h
25h
26h
0000h
0000h
0007h
0007h
000Ah
0000h
0001h
0005h
0004h
0000h
VPP Min. voltage (00h = no VPP pin present)
V
PP Max. voltage (00h = no VPP pin present)
Typical timeout per single byte/word write 2N µs
Typical timeout for Min. size buffer write 2N µs (00h = not supported)
Typical timeout per individual block erase 2N ms
Typical timeout for full chip erase 2N ms (00h = not supported)
Max. timeout for byte/word write 2N times typical
Max. timeout for buffer write 2N times typical
Max. timeout per individual block erase 2N times typical
Max. timeout for full chip erase 2N times typical (00h = not supported)
Table 7. Device Geometry Definition
Addresses
(x16)
Data
Description
27h
0017h
Device Size = 2N byte
28h
29h
0002h
0000h
Flash Device Interface description (refer to CFI publication 100)
2Ah
2Bh
0005h
0000h
Max. number of byte in multi-byte write = 2N
(00h = not supported)
2Ch
0001h
Number of Erase Block Regions within device (01h = uniform device, 02h = boot device)
2Dh
2Eh
2Fh
30h
007Fh
0000h
0000h
0001h
Erase Block Region 1 Information
(refer to the CFI specification or CFI publication 100)
31h
32h
33h
34h
0000h
0000h
0000h
0000h
Erase Block Region 2 Information (refer to CFI publication 100)
Erase Block Region 3 Information (refer to CFI publication 100)
Erase Block Region 4 Information (refer to CFI publication 100)
35h
36h
37h
38h
0000h
0000h
0000h
0000h
39h
3Ah
3Bh
3Ch
0000h
0000h
0000h
0000h
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
93
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
Table 8. Primary Vendor-Specific Extended Query
Addresses
(x16)
Data
Description
40h
41h
42h
0050h
0052h
0049h
Query-unique ASCII string “PRI”
43h
44h
0031h
0033h
Major version number, ASCII
Minor version number, ASCII
Address Sensitive Unlock (Bits 1-0)
0 = Required, 1 = Not Required
45h
0008h
Process Technology (Bits 7-2) 0010b = 0.23 µm MirrorBit
Erase Suspend
0 = Not Supported, 1 = To Read Only, 2 = To Read & Write
46h
47h
48h
49h
4Ah
4Bh
4Ch
0002h
0001h
0001h
0004h
0000h
0000h
0001h
Sector Protect
0 = Not Supported, X = Number of sectors in per group
Sector Temporary Unprotect
00 = Not Supported, 01 = Supported
Sector Protect/Unprotect scheme
04 = 29LV800 mode
Simultaneous Operation
00 = Not Supported, X = Number of Sectors in Bank
Burst Mode Type
00 = Not Supported, 01 = Supported
Page Mode Type
00 = Not Supported, 01 = 4 Word/8 Byte Page, 02 = 8 Word/16 Byte Page
ACC (Acceleration) Supply Minimum
4Dh
4Eh
00B5h
00C5h
00h = Not Supported, D7-D4: Volt, D3-D0: 100 mV
ACC (Acceleration) Supply Maximum
00h = Not Supported, D7-D4: Volt, D3-D0: 100 mV
Top/Bottom Boot Sector Flag
0004h/
0005h
4Fh
50h
00h = Uniform Device without WP# protect, 02h = Bottom Boot Device, 03h = Top Boot Device,
04h = Uniform sectors bottom WP# protect, 05h = Uniform sectors top WP# protect
Program Suspend
0001h
00h = Not Supported, 01h = Supported
COMMAND DEFINITIONS
Writing specific address and data commands or se-
quences into the command register initiates device op-
erations. Tables 10 and 11 define the valid register
command sequences. Writing incorrect address and
data values or writing them in the improper se-
quence may place the device in an unknown state. A
reset command is then required to return the device to
reading array data.
first. Refer to the AC Characteristics section for timing
diagrams.
Reading Array Data
The device is automatically set to reading array data
after device power-up. No commands are required to
retrieve data. The device is ready to read array data
after completing an Embedded Program or Embedded
Erase algorithm.
All addresses are latched on the falling edge of WE#
or CE#, whichever happens later. All data is latched on
the rising edge of WE# or CE#, whichever happens
After the device accepts an Erase Suspend command,
the device enters the erase-suspend-read mode, after
which the system can read data from any
94
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
non-erase-suspended sector. After completing a pro-
Autoselect Command Sequence
The autoselect command sequence allows the host
system to read several identifier codes at specific ad-
dresses:
gramming operation in the Erase Suspend mode, the
system may once again read array data with the same
exception. See the Erase Suspend/Erase Resume
Commands section for more information.
A7:A0
Identifier Code
(x16)
The system must issue the reset command to return
the device to the read (or erase-suspend-read) mode if
DQ5 goes high during an active program or erase op-
eration, or if the device is in the autoselect mode. See
the next section, Reset Command, for more informa-
tion.
Manufacturer ID
Device ID, Cycle 1
00h
01h
Device ID, Cycle 2
0Eh
Device ID, Cycle 3
0Fh
SecSi Sector Factory Protect
Sector Protect Verify
03h
(SA)02h
See also Requirements for Reading Array Data in the
Device Bus Operations section for more information.
The Read-Only Operations table provides the read pa-
rameters, and Figure 14 shows the timing diagram.
Note: The device ID is read over three cycles. SA = Sector
Address
Tables 10 and 11 show the address requirements and
codes. The autoselect command sequence may be
written to an address that is either in the read or
erase-suspend-read mode. The autoselect command
may not be written while the device is actively pro-
gramming or erasing.
Reset Command
Writing the reset command resets the device to the
read or erase-suspend-read mode. Address bits are
don’t cares for this command.
The autoselect command sequence is initiated by first
writing two unlock cycles. This is followed by a third
write cycle that contains the autoselect command. The
device then enters the autoselect mode. The system
may read at any address any number of times without
initiating another autoselect command sequence:
The reset command may be written between the se-
quence cycles in an erase command sequence before
erasing begins. This resets the device to the read
mode. Once erasure begins, however, the device ig-
nores reset commands until the operation is complete.
The reset command may be written between the
sequence cycles in a program command sequence
before programming begins. This resets the device to
the read mode. If the program command sequence is
written while the device is in the Erase Suspend mode,
writing the reset command returns the device to the
erase-suspend-read mode. Once programming be-
gins, however, the device ignores reset commands
until the operation is complete.
The system must write the reset command to return to
the read mode (or erase-suspend-read mode if the de-
vice was previously in Erase Suspend).
Enter SecSi Sector/Exit SecSi Sector
Command Sequence
The SecSi Sector region provides a secured data area
containing an 8-word/16-byte random Electronic Serial
Number (ESN). The system can access the SecSi
Sector region by issuing the three-cycle Enter SecSi
Sector command sequence. The device continues to
access the SecSi Sector region until the system is-
sues the four-cycle Exit SecSi Sector command se-
quence. The Exit SecSi Sector command sequence
returns the device to normal operation. Tables 10 and
11 show the address and data requirements for both
command sequences. See also “SecSi (Secured Sili-
con) Sector Flash Memory Region” for further informa-
tion. Note that the ACC function and unlock bypass
modes are not available when the SecSi Sector is en-
abled.
The reset command may be written between the se-
quence cycles in an autoselect command sequence.
Once in the autoselect mode, the reset command
must be written to return to the read mode. If the de-
vice entered the autoselect mode while in the Erase
Suspend mode, writing the reset command returns the
device to the erase-suspend-read mode.
If DQ5 goes high during a program or erase operation,
writing the reset command returns the device to the
read mode (or erase-suspend-read mode if the device
was in Erase Suspend).
Note that if DQ1 goes high during a Write Buffer Pro-
gramming operation, the system must write the
Write-to-Buffer-Abort Reset command sequence to
reset the device for the next operation.
Word Program Command Sequence
Programming is a four-bus-cycle operation. The pro-
gram command sequence is initiated by writing two
unlock write cycles, followed by the program set-up
command. The program address and data are written
next, which in turn initiate the Embedded Program al-
gorithm. The system is not required to provide further
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
95
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
controls or timings. The device automatically provides
Write Buffer Programming
internally generated program pulses and verifies the
programmed cell margin. Tables 10 and 11 show the
address and data requirements for the word/byte pro-
gram command sequence, respectively.
Write Buffer Programming allows the system write to a
maximum of 16 words/32 bytes in one programming
operation. This results in faster effective programming
time than the standard programming algorithms. The
Write Buffer Programming command sequence is initi-
ated by first writing two unlock cycles. This is followed
by a third write cycle containing the Write Buffer Load
command written at the Sector Address in which pro-
gramming will occur. The fourth cycle writes the sector
address and the number of word locations, minus one,
to be programmed. For example, if the system will pro-
gram 6 unique address locations, then 05h should be
written to the device. This tells the device how many
write buffer addresses will be loaded with data and
therefore when to expect the Program Buffer to Flash
command. The number of locations to program cannot
exceed the size of the write buffer or the operation will
abort.
When the Embedded Program algorithm is complete,
the device then returns to the read mode and ad-
dresses are no longer latched. The system can deter-
mine the status of the program operation by using
DQ7 or DQ6. Refer to the Write Operation Status sec-
tion for information on these status bits.
Any commands written to the device during the Em-
bedded Program Algorithm are ignored. Note that a
hardware reset immediately terminates the program
operation. The program command sequence should
be reinitiated once the device has returned to the read
mode, to ensure data integrity. Note that the ACC
function and unlock bypass modes are not available
when the SecSi Sector is enabled.
The fifth cycle writes the first address location and
data to be programmed. The write-buffer-page is se-
lected by address bits AMAX–A4. All subsequent ad-
dress/data pairs must fall within the
selected-write-buffer-page. The system then writes the
remaining address/data pairs into the write buffer.
Write buffer locations may be loaded in any order.
Programming is allowed in any sequence and across
sector boundaries. A bit cannot be programmed
from “0” back to a “1.” Attempting to do so may
cause the device to set DQ5 = 1, or cause the DQ7
and DQ6 status bits to indicate the operation was suc-
cessful. However, a succeeding read will show that the
data is still “0.” Only erase operations can convert a “0”
to a “1.”
The write-buffer-page address must be the same for
all address/data pairs loaded into the write buffer.
(This means Write Buffer Programming cannot be per-
formed across multiple write-buffer pages. This also
means that Write Buffer Programming cannot be per-
formed across multiple sectors. If the system attempts
to load programming data outside of the selected
write-buffer page, the operation will abort.
Unlock Bypass Command Sequence
The unlock bypass feature allows the system to pro-
gram words to the device faster than using the stan-
dard program command sequence. The unlock bypass
command sequence is initiated by first writing two un-
lock cycles. This is followed by a third write cycle con-
taining the unlock bypass command, 20h. The device
then enters the unlock bypass mode. A two-cycle un-
lock bypass program command sequence is all that is
required to program in this mode. The first cycle in this
sequence contains the unlock bypass program com-
mand, A0h; the second cycle contains the program
address and data. Additional data is programmed in
the same manner. This mode dispenses with the initial
two unlock cycles required in the standard program
command sequence, resulting in faster total program-
ming time. Tables 10 and 11 show the requirements
for the command sequence.
Note that if a Write Buffer address location is loaded
multiple times, the address/data pair counter will be
decremented for every data load operation. The host
system must therefore account for loading a
write-buffer location more than once. The counter
decrements for each data load operation, not for each
unique write-buffer-address location. Note also that if
an address location is loaded more than once into the
buffer, the final data loaded for that address will be
programmed.
Once the specified number of write buffer locations
have been loaded, the system must then write the Pro-
gram Buffer to Flash command at the sector address.
Any other address and data combination aborts the
Write Buffer Programming operation. The device then
begins programming. Data polling should be used
while monitoring the last address location loaded into
the write buffer. DQ7, DQ6, DQ5, and DQ1 should be
monitored to determine the device status during Write
Buffer Programming.
During the unlock bypass mode, only the Unlock By-
pass Program and Unlock Bypass Reset commands
are valid. To exit the unlock bypass mode, the system
must issue the two-cycle unlock bypass reset com-
mand sequence. The first cycle must contain the data
90h. The second cycle must contain the data 00h. The
device then returns to the read mode.
96
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
The write-buffer programming operation can be sus-
command sequence must be written to reset the de-
vice for the next operation. Note that the full 3-cycle
Write-to-Buffer-Abort Reset command sequence is re-
quired when using Write-Buffer-Programming features
in Unlock Bypass mode.
pended using the standard program suspend/resume
commands. Upon successful completion of the Write
Buffer Programming operation, the device is ready to
execute the next command.
The Write Buffer Programming Sequence can be
aborted in the following ways:
Accelerated Program
The device offers accelerated program operations
through the WP#/ACC pin. When the system asserts
VHH on the WP#/ACC pin, the device automatically en-
ters the Unlock Bypass mode. The system may then
write the two-cycle Unlock Bypass program command
sequence. The device uses the higher voltage on the
WP#/ACC pin to accelerate the operation. Note that
the WP#/ACC pin must not be at VHH for operations
other than accelerated programming, or device dam-
age may result. In addition, no external pullup is nec-
essary since the WP#/ACC pin has internal pullup to
■ Load a value that is greater than the page buffer
size during the Number of Locations to Program
step.
■ Write to an address in a sector different than the
one specified during the Write-Buffer-Load com-
mand.
■ Write an Address/Data pair to
a
different
write-buffer-page than the one selected by the
Starting Address during the write buffer data load-
ing stage of the operation.
VCC
.
■ Write data other than the Confirm Command after
Figure 5 illustrates the algorithm for the program oper-
ation. Refer to the Erase and Program Operations
table in the AC Characteristics section for parameters,
and Figure 17 for timing diagrams.
the specified number of data load cycles.
The abort condition is indicated by DQ1 = 1, DQ7 =
DATA# (for the last address location loaded), DQ6 =
toggle, and DQ5=0. A Write-to-Buffer-Abort Reset
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
97
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
Write “Write to Buffer”
command and
Sector Address
Part of “Write to Buffer”
Command Sequence
Write number of addresses
to program minus 1(WC)
and Sector Address
Write first address/data
Yes
WC = 0 ?
No
Write to a different
sector address
Abort Write to
Buffer Operation?
Yes
Write to buffer ABORTED.
Must write “Write-to-buffer
Abort Reset” command
sequence to return
No
(Note 1)
Write next address/data pair
to read mode.
WC = WC - 1
Write program buffer to
flash sector address
Notes:
1. When Sector Address is specified, any address in
the selected sector is acceptable. However, when
loading Write-Buffer address locations with data, all
addresses must fall within the selected Write-Buffer
Page.
Read DQ7 - DQ0 at
Last Loaded Address
2. DQ7 may change simultaneously with DQ5.
Therefore, DQ7 should be verified.
3. If this flowchart location was reached because
DQ5= “1”, then the device FAILED. If this flowchart
location was reached because DQ1= “1”, then the
Write to Buffer operation was ABORTED. In either
case, the proper reset command must be written
before the device can begin another operation. If
DQ1=1, write the
Yes
DQ7 = Data?
No
No
Write-Buffer-Programming-Abort-Reset
command. if DQ5=1, write the Reset command.
No
DQ1 = 1?
Yes
DQ5 = 1?
Yes
4. See Table 11 for command sequences required for
write buffer programming.
Read DQ7 - DQ0 with
address = Last Loaded
Address
Yes
(Note 2)
DQ7 = Data?
No
(Note 3)
FAIL or ABORT
PASS
Figure 4. Write Buffer Programming Operation
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
98
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
Program Suspend/Program Resume
Command Sequence
The Program Suspend command allows the system to
interrupt a programming operation or a Write to Buffer
programming operation so that data can be read from
any non-suspended sector. When the Program Sus-
pend command is written during a programming pro-
cess, the device halts the program operation within 15
µs maximum (5 µs typical) and updates the status bits.
Addresses are not required when writing the Program
Suspend command.
START
Write Program
Command Sequence
Data Poll
from System
Embedded
Program
algorithm
in progress
After the programming operation has been sus-
pended, the system can read array data from any
non-suspended sector. The Program Suspend com-
mand may also be issued during a programming oper-
ation while an erase is suspended. In this case, data
may be read from any addresses not in Erase Sus-
pend or Program Suspend. If a read is needed from
the SecSi Sector area (One-time Program area), then
user must use the proper command sequences to
enter and exit this region. Note that the SecSi Sector,
autoselect, and CFI functions are unavailable when an
program operation is in progress.
Verify Data?
Yes
No
No
Increment Address
Last Address?
Yes
The system may also write the autoselect command
sequence when the device is in the Program Suspend
mode. The system can read as many autoselect
codes as required. When the device exits the autose-
lect mode, the device reverts to the Program Suspend
mode, and is ready for another valid operation. See
Autoselect Command Sequence for more information.
Programming
Completed
Note: See Table 11 for program command sequence.
Figure 5. Program Operation
After the Program Resume command is written, the
device reverts to programming. The system can de-
termine the status of the program operation using the
DQ7 or DQ6 status bits, just as in the standard pro-
gram operation. See Write Operation Status for more
information.
The system must write the Program Resume com-
mand (address bits are don’t care) to exit the Program
Suspend mode and continue the programming opera-
tion. Further writes of the Resume command are ig-
nored. Another Program Suspend command can be
written after the device has resume programming.
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
99
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
When the Embedded Erase algorithm is complete, the
device returns to the read mode and addresses are no
longer latched. The system can determine the status
of the erase operation by using DQ7, DQ6, or DQ2.
Refer to the Write Operation Status section for infor-
mation on these status bits.
Program Operation
or Write-to-Buffer
Sequence in Progress
Write Program Suspend
Command Sequence
Write address/data
XXXh/B0h
Any commands written during the chip erase operation
are ignored. However, note that a hardware reset im-
mediately terminates the erase operation. If that oc-
curs, the chip erase command sequence should be
reinitiated once the device has returned to reading
array data, to ensure data integrity. Note that the
SecSi Sector, autoselect, and CFI functions are un-
available when an erase operation is in progress.
Command is also valid for
Erase-suspended-program
operations
Wait 15 µs
Autoselect and SecSi Sector
read operations are also allowed
Read data as
required
Data cannot be read from erase- or
program-suspended sectors
Figure 7 illustrates the algorithm for the erase opera-
tion. Refer to the Erase and Program Operations ta-
bles in the AC Characteristics section for parameters,
and Figure 19 section for timing diagrams.
Done
reading?
No
Yes
Sector Erase Command Sequence
Write Program Resume
Command Sequence
Write address/data
XXXh/30h
Sector erase is a six bus cycle operation. The sector
erase command sequence is initiated by writing two
unlock cycles, followed by a set-up command. Two ad-
ditional unlock cycles are written, and are then fol-
lowed by the address of the sector to be erased, and
the sector erase command. Tables 10 and 11 show the
address and data requirements for the sector erase
command sequence.
Device reverts to
operation prior to
Program Suspend
Figure 6. Program Suspend/Program Resume
The device does not require the system to preprogram
prior to erase. The Embedded Erase algorithm auto-
matically programs and verifies the entire memory for
an all zero data pattern prior to electrical erase. The
system is not required to provide any controls or tim-
ings during these operations.
Chip Erase Command Sequence
Chip erase is a six bus cycle operation. The chip erase
command sequence is initiated by writing two unlock
cycles, followed by a set-up command. Two additional
unlock write cycles are then followed by the chip erase
command, which in turn invokes the Embedded Erase
algorithm. The device does not require the system to
preprogram prior to erase. The Embedded Erase algo-
rithm automatically preprograms and verifies the entire
memory for an all zero data pattern prior to electrical
erase. The system is not required to provide any con-
trols or timings during these operations. Tables 10 and
11 show the address and data requirements for the
chip erase command sequence.
After the command sequence is written, a sector erase
time-out of 50 µs occurs. During the time-out period,
additional sector addresses and sector erase com-
mands may be written. Loading the sector erase buffer
may be done in any sequence, and the number of sec-
tors may be from one sector to all sectors. The time
between these additional cycles must be less than 50
µs, otherwise erasure may begin. Any sector erase ad-
dress and command following the exceeded time-out
may or may not be accepted. It is recommended that
processor interrupts be disabled during this time to en-
sure all commands are accepted. The interrupts can
be re-enabled after the last Sector Erase command is
written. Any command other than Sector Erase or
Erase Suspend during the time-out period resets
the device to the read mode. The system must re-
write the command sequence and any additional ad-
dresses and commands. Note that the SecSi Sector,
autoselect, and CFI functions are unavailable when an
erase operation is in progress.
100
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
The system can monitor DQ3 to determine if the sec-
Erase Suspend/Erase Resume
Commands
tor erase timer has timed out (See the section on DQ3:
Sector Erase Timer.). The time-out begins from the ris-
ing edge of the final WE# pulse in the command
sequence.
The Erase Suspend command, B0h, allows the sys-
tem to interrupt a sector erase operation and then read
data from, or program data to, any sector not selected
for erasure. This command is valid only during the sec-
tor erase operation, including the 50 µs time-out pe-
riod during the sector erase command sequence. The
Erase Suspend command is ignored if written during
the chip erase operation or Embedded Program
algorithm.
When the Embedded Erase algorithm is complete, the
device returns to reading array data and addresses
are no longer latched. The system can determine the
status of the erase operation by reading DQ7, DQ6, or
DQ2 in the erasing sector. Refer to the Write Opera-
tion Status section for information on these status bits.
Once the sector erase operation has begun, only the
Erase Suspend command is valid. All other com-
mands are ignored. However, note that a hardware
reset immediately terminates the erase operation. If
that occurs, the sector erase command sequence
should be reinitiated once the device has returned to
reading array data, to ensure data integrity.
When the Erase Suspend command is written during
the sector erase operation, the device requires a max-
imum of 20 (typical 5 µs) to suspend the erase opera-
tion. However, when the Erase Suspend command is
written during the sector erase time-out, the device im-
mediately terminates the time-out period and sus-
pends the erase operation.
Figure 7 illustrates the algorithm for the erase opera-
tion. Refer to the Erase and Program Operations ta-
bles in the AC Characteristics section for parameters,
and Figure 19 section for timing diagrams.
After the erase operation has been suspended, the
device enters the erase-suspend-read mode. The sys-
tem can read data from or program data to any sector
not selected for erasure. (The device “erase sus-
pends” all sectors selected for erasure.) Reading at
any address within erase-suspended sectors pro-
duces status information on DQ7–DQ0. The system
can use DQ7, or DQ6 and DQ2 together, to determine
if a sector is actively erasing or is erase-suspended.
Refer to the Write Operation Status section for infor-
mation on these status bits.
START
Write Erase
Command Sequence
(Notes 1, 2)
After an erase-suspended program operation is com-
plete, the device returns to the erase-suspend-read
mode. The system can determine the status of the
program operation using the DQ7 or DQ6 status bits,
just as in the standard word program operation.
Refer to the Write Operation Status section for more
information.
Data Poll to Erasing
Bank from System
Embedded
Erase
algorithm
in progress
In the erase-suspend-read mode, the system can also
issue the autoselect command sequence. Refer to the
Autoselect Mode and Autoselect Command Sequence
sections for details.
No
Data = FFh?
To resume the sector erase operation, the system
must write the Erase Resume command. The address
of the erase-suspended sector is required when writ-
ing this command. Further writes of the Resume com-
mand are ignored. Another Erase Suspend command
can be written after the chip has resumed erasing.
Yes
Erasure Completed
Notes:
1. See Tables 10 and 11 for erase command sequence.
2. See the section on DQ3 for information on the sector
erase timer.
Figure 7. Erase Operation
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
101
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
Command Definitions
Table 9. Command Definitions (x16 Mode)
Bus Cycles (Notes 2–5)
Command
Sequence
(Note 1)
First
Second
Third
Fourth
Fifth
Sixth
Addr Data
Addr Data
Addr
Data
Addr
Data
Addr Data Addr Data
Read (Note 5)
1
1
4
6
RA
XXX
555
555
RD
F0
Reset (Note 6)
Manufacturer ID
Device ID (Note 8)
AA
AA
2AA
2AA
55
55
555
555
90
90
X00
X01
0001
227E
X0E 220C X0F 2201
SecSi™ Sector Factory Protect
(Note 9)
4
4
555
555
AA
AA
2AA
2AA
55
55
555
555
90
90
X03
(Note 10)
00/01
Sector Group Protect Verify
(Note 10)
(SA)X02
Enter SecSi Sector Region
Exit SecSi Sector Region
Program
3
4
4
6
1
3
3
2
2
6
6
1
1
1
555
555
555
555
SA
AA
AA
AA
AA
29
2AA
2AA
2AA
2AA
55
55
55
55
555
555
555
SA
88
90
A0
25
XXX
PA
00
PD
WC
Write to Buffer (Note 11)
Program Buffer to Flash
Write to Buffer Abort Reset (Note 12)
Unlock Bypass
SA
PA
PD
WBL
PD
555
555
XXX
XXX
555
555
BA
AA
AA
A0
90
2AA
2AA
PA
55
55
PD
00
55
55
555
555
F0
20
Unlock Bypass Program (Note 13)
Unlock Bypass Reset (Note 14)
Chip Erase
XXX
2AA
2AA
AA
AA
B0
30
555
555
80
80
555
555
AA
AA
2AA
2AA
55
55
555
SA
10
30
Sector Erase
Program/Erase Suspend (Note 15)
Program/Erase Resume (Note 16)
CFI Query (Note 17)
BA
55
98
Legend:
X = Don’t care
SA = Sector Address of sector to be verified (in autoselect mode) or
erased. Address bits A21–A15 uniquely select any sector.
WBL = Write Buffer Location. Address must be within same write buffer
page as PA.
RA = Read Address of memory location to be read.
RD = Read Data read from location RA during read operation.
PA = Program Address . Addresses latch on falling edge of WE# or CE#
pulse, whichever happens later.
WC = Word Count. Number of write buffer locations to load minus 1.
PD = Program Data for location PA. Data latches on rising edge of WE#
or CE# pulse, whichever happens first.
Notes:
1. See Table 1 for description of bus operations.
9. WP# protects highest address sector, data is 98h for factory
locked and 18h for not factory locked. Data is 00h for an
unprotected sector group and 01h for a protected sector group.
2. All values are in hexadecimal.
3. Shaded cells indicate read cycles. All others are write cycles.
10. Total number of cycles in command sequence is determined by
number of words written to write buffer. Maximum number of
cycles in command sequence is 21.
4. During unlock and command cycles, when lower address bits are
555 or 2AA as shown in table, address bits above A11 and data
bits above DQ7 are don’t care.
11. Command sequence resets device for next command after
aborted write-to-buffer operation.
5. No unlock or command cycles required when device is in read
mode.
12. Unlock Bypass command is required prior to Unlock Bypass
Program command.
6. Reset command is required to return to read mode (or to
erase-suspend-read mode if previously in Erase Suspend) when
device is in autoselect mode, or if DQ5 goes high while device is
providing status information.
13. Unlock Bypass Reset command is required to return to read
mode when device is in unlock bypass mode.
14. System may read and program in non-erasing sectors, or enter
autoselect mode, when in Erase Suspend mode. Erase Suspend
command is valid only during a sector erase operation.
7. Fourth cycle of the autoselect command sequence is a read
cycle. Data bits DQ15–DQ8 are don’t care. Except for RD, PD
and WC. See Autoselect Command Sequence section for more
information.
15. Erase Resume command is valid only during Erase Suspend
mode.
8. Device ID must be read in three cycles.
16. Command is valid when device is ready to read array data or when
device is in autoselect mode.
102
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
WRITE OPERATION STATUS
The device provides several bits to determine the status of a
program or erase operation: DQ2, DQ3, DQ5, DQ6, and
DQ7. Table 12 and the following subsections describe the
function of these bits. DQ7 and DQ6 each offer a method for
determining whether a program or erase operation is com-
plete or in progress. The device also provides a hard-
ware-based output signal, RY/BY#, to determine
whether an Embedded Program or Erase operation is
in progress or has been completed.
valid data, the data outputs on DQ0–DQ6 may be still
invalid. Valid data on DQ0–DQ7 will appear on suc-
cessive read cycles.
Table 12 shows the outputs for Data# Polling on DQ7.
Figure 8 shows the Data# Polling algorithm. Figure 20
in the AC Characteristics section shows the Data#
Polling timing diagram.
DQ7: Data# Polling
START
The Data# Polling bit, DQ7, indicates to the host system
whether an Embedded Program or Erase algorithm is in
progress or completed, or whether the device is in Erase
Suspend. Data# Polling is valid after the rising edge of the
final WE# pulse in the command sequence.
Read DQ7–DQ0
Addr = VA
During the Embedded Program algorithm, the device out-
puts on DQ7 the complement of the datum programmed to
DQ7. This DQ7 status also applies to programming during
Erase Suspend. When the Embedded Program algorithm is
complete, the device outputs the datum programmed to
DQ7. The system must provide the program address to
read valid status information on DQ7. If a program address
falls within a protected sector, Data# Polling on DQ7 is ac-
tive for approximately 1 µs, then the device returns to the
read mode.
Yes
DQ7 = Data?
No
No
DQ5 = 1?
During the Embedded Erase algorithm, Data# Polling
produces a “0” on DQ7. When the Embedded Erase
algorithm is complete, or if the device enters the Erase
Suspend mode, Data# Polling produces a “1” on DQ7.
The system must provide an address within any of the
sectors selected for erasure to read valid status infor-
mation on DQ7.
Yes
Read DQ7–DQ0
Addr = VA
After an erase command sequence is written, if all
sectors selected for erasing are protected, Data# Poll-
ing on DQ7 is active for approximately 100 µs, then the
device returns to the read mode. If not all selected
sectors are protected, the Embedded Erase algorithm
erases the unprotected sectors, and ignores the se-
lected sectors that are protected. However, if the sys-
tem reads DQ7 at an address within a protected
sector, the status may not be valid.
Yes
DQ7 = Data?
No
PASS
FAIL
Notes:
1. VA = Valid address for programming. During a sector
erase operation, a valid address is any sector address
within the sector being erased. During chip erase, a
valid address is any non-protected sector address.
Just prior to the completion of an Embedded Program
or Erase operation, DQ7 may change asynchronously
with DQ0–DQ6 while Output Enable (OE#) is asserted
low. That is, the device may change from providing
status information to valid data on DQ7. Depending on
when the system samples the DQ7 output, it may read
the status or valid data. Even if the device has com-
pleted the program or erase operation and DQ7 has
2. DQ7 should be rechecked even if DQ5 = “1” because
DQ7 may change simultaneously with DQ5.
Figure 8. Data# Polling Algorithm
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
103
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
After an erase command sequence is written, if all sectors
RY/BY#: Ready/Busy#
selected for erasing are protected, DQ6 toggles for approxi-
mately 100 µs, then returns to reading array data. If not all
selected sectors are protected, the Embedded Erase algo-
rithm erases the unprotected sectors, and ignores the se-
lected sectors that are protected.
The RY/BY# is a dedicated, open-drain output pin
which indicates whether an Embedded Algorithm is in
progress or complete. The RY/BY# status is valid after
the rising edge of the final WE# pulse in the command
sequence. Since RY/BY# is an open-drain output, sev-
eral RY/BY# pins can be tied together in parallel with a
The system can use DQ6 and DQ2 together to determine
whether a sector is actively erasing or is erase-suspended.
When the device is actively erasing (that is, the Embedded
Erase algorithm is in progress), DQ6 toggles. When the de-
vice enters the Erase Suspend mode, DQ6 stops toggling.
However, the system must also use DQ2 to determine
which sectors are erasing or erase-suspended. Alterna-
tively, the system can use DQ7 (see the subsection on
DQ7: Data# Polling).
pull-up resistor to VCC
.
If the output is low (Busy), the device is actively eras-
ing or programming. (This includes programming in
the Erase Suspend mode.) If the output is high
(Ready), the device is in the read mode, the standby
mode, or in the erase-suspend-read mode. Table 12
shows the outputs for RY/BY#.
DQ6: Toggle Bit I
If a program address falls within a protected sector,
DQ6 toggles for approximately 1 µs after the program
command sequence is written, then returns to reading
array data.
Toggle Bit I on DQ6 indicates whether an Embedded
Program or Erase algorithm is in progress or com-
plete, or whether the device has entered the Erase
Suspend mode. Toggle Bit I may be read at any ad-
dress, and is valid after the rising edge of the final
WE# pulse in the command sequence (prior to the
program or erase operation), and during the sector
erase time-out.
DQ6 also toggles during the erase-suspend-program
mode, and stops toggling once the Embedded Pro-
gram algorithm is complete.
Table 12 shows the outputs for Toggle Bit I on DQ6.
Figure 9 shows the toggle bit algorithm. Figure 21 in
the “AC Characteristics” section shows the toggle bit
timing diagrams. Figure 22 shows the differences be-
tween DQ2 and DQ6 in graphical form. See also the
subsection on DQ2: Toggle Bit II.
During an Embedded Program or Erase algorithm op-
eration, successive read cycles to any address cause
DQ6 to toggle. The system may use either OE# or
CE# to control the read cycles. When the operation is
complete, DQ6 stops toggling.
104
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
DQ2: Toggle Bit II
The “Toggle Bit II” on DQ2, when used with DQ6, indi-
cates whether a particular sector is actively erasing
(that is, the Embedded Erase algorithm is in progress),
or whether that sector is erase-suspended. Toggle Bit
II is valid after the rising edge of the final WE# pulse in
the command sequence.
START
Read Byte
(DQ7–DQ0)
Address =VA
DQ2 toggles when the system reads at addresses
within those sectors that have been selected for era-
sure. (The system may use either OE# or CE# to con-
trol the read cycles.) But DQ2 cannot distinguish
whether the sector is actively erasing or is erase-sus-
pended. DQ6, by comparison, indicates whether the
device is actively erasing, or is in Erase Suspend, but
cannot distinguish which sectors are selected for era-
sure. Thus, both status bits are required for sector and
mode information. Refer to Table 12 to compare out-
puts for DQ2 and DQ6.
Read Byte
(DQ7–DQ0)
Address =VA
No
Toggle Bit
= Toggle?
Yes
Figure 9 shows the toggle bit algorithm in flowchart
form, and the section “DQ2: Toggle Bit II” explains the
algorithm. See also the RY/BY#: Ready/Busy# sub-
section. Figure 21 shows the toggle bit timing diagram.
Figure 22 shows the differences between DQ2 and
DQ6 in graphical form.
No
DQ5 = 1?
Yes
Read Byte Twice
(DQ7–DQ0)
Address = VA
Reading Toggle Bits DQ6/DQ2
Refer to Figure 9 for the following discussion. When-
ever the system initially begins reading toggle bit sta-
tus, it must read DQ7–DQ0 at least twice in a row to
determine whether a toggle bit is toggling. Typically,
the system would note and store the value of the tog-
gle bit after the first read. After the second read, the
system would compare the new value of the toggle bit
with the first. If the toggle bit is not toggling, the device
has completed the program or erase operation. The
system can read array data on DQ7–DQ0 on the fol-
lowing read cycle.
Toggle Bit
= Toggle?
No
Yes
Program/Erase
Operation Not
Complete, Write
Reset Command
Program/Erase
Operation Complete
However, if after the initial two read cycles, the system
determines that the toggle bit is still toggling, the sys-
tem also should note whether the value of DQ5 is high
(see the section on DQ5). If it is, the system should
then determine again whether the toggle bit is tog-
gling, since the toggle bit may have stopped toggling
just as DQ5 went high. If the toggle bit is no longer
toggling, the device has successfully completed the
program or erase operation. If it is still toggling, the de-
vice did not completed the operation successfully, and
the system must write the reset command to return to
reading array data.
Note: The system should recheck the toggle bit even if
DQ5 = “1” because the toggle bit may stop toggling as DQ5
changes to “1.” See the subsections on DQ6 and DQ2 for
more information.
Figure 9. Toggle Bit Algorithm
The remaining scenario is that the system initially de-
termines that the toggle bit is toggling and DQ5 has
not gone high. The system may continue to monitor
the toggle bit and DQ5 through successive read cy-
cles, determining the status as described in the previ-
ous paragraph. Alternatively, it may choose to perform
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
105
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
other system tasks. In this case, the system must start
at the beginning of the algorithm when it returns to de-
termine the status of the operation (top of Figure 9).
mand. When the time-out period is complete, DQ3
switches from a “0” to a “1.” If the time between addi-
tional sector erase commands from the system can be
assumed to be less than 50 µs, the system need not
monitor DQ3. See also the Sector Erase Command
Sequence section.
DQ5: Exceeded Timing Limits
DQ5 indicates whether the program, erase, or
write-to-buffer time has exceeded a specified internal
pulse count limit. Under these conditions DQ5 produces a
“1,” indicating that the program or erase cycle was not suc-
cessfully completed.
After the sector erase command is written, the system
should read the status of DQ7 (Data# Polling) or DQ6
(Toggle Bit I) to ensure that the device has accepted
the command sequence, and then read DQ3. If DQ3 is
“1,” the Embedded Erase algorithm has begun; all fur-
ther commands (except Erase Suspend) are ignored
until the erase operation is complete. If DQ3 is “0,” the
device will accept additional sector erase commands.
To ensure the command has been accepted, the sys-
tem software should check the status of DQ3 prior to
and following each subsequent sector erase com-
mand. If DQ3 is high on the second status check, the
last command might not have been accepted.
The device may output a “1” on DQ5 if the system tries
to program a “1” to a location that was previously pro-
grammed to “0.” Only an erase operation can
change a “0” back to a “1.” Under this condition, the
device halts the operation, and when the timing limit
has been exceeded, DQ5 produces a “1.”
In all these cases, the system must write the reset
command to return the device to the reading the array
(or to erase-suspend-read if the device was previously
in the erase-suspend-program mode).
Table 12 shows the status of DQ3 relative to the other
status bits.
DQ3: Sector Erase Timer
DQ1: Write-to-Buffer Abort
DQ1 indicates whether a Write-to-Buffer operation
was aborted. Under these conditions DQ1 produces a
After writing a sector erase command sequence, the
system may read DQ3 to determine whether or not
erasure has begun. (The sector erase timer does not
apply to the chip erase command.) If additional
sectors are selected for erasure, the entire time-out
also applies after each additional sector erase com-
“1”.
The
system
must
issue
the
Write-to-Buffer-Abort-Reset command sequence to re-
turn the device to reading array data. See Write Buffer
Table 10. Write Operation Status
DQ7
DQ5
DQ2
Status
(Note 2)
DQ6
(Note 1)
DQ3
N/A
1
(Note 2)
DQ1 RY/BY#
Embedded Program Algorithm
Embedded Erase Algorithm
Program-Suspended
DQ7#
0
Toggle
Toggle
0
0
No toggle
Toggle
0
0
0
Standard
Mode
N/A
Invalid (not allowed)
Data
1
1
1
1
0
Program
Suspend
Mode
Program-
Sector
Suspend
Non-Program
Read
Suspended Sector
Erase-Suspended
1
No toggle
Toggle
0
N/A
Toggle
N/A
N/A
N/A
Erase-
Sector
Suspend
Erase
Suspend
Mode
Non-EraseSuspended
Read
Data
Sector
Erase-Suspend-Program
(Embedded Program)
DQ7#
0
N/A
Busy (Note 3)
Abort (Note 4)
DQ7#
DQ7#
Toggle
Toggle
0
0
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
0
1
0
0
Write-to-
Buffer
Notes:
1. DQ5 switches to ‘1’ when an Embedded Program, Embedded Erase, or Write-to-Buffer operation has exceeded the
maximum timing limits. Refer to the section on DQ5 for more information.
2. DQ7 and DQ2 require a valid address when reading status information. Refer to the appropriate subsection for further details.
3. The Data# Polling algorithm should be used to monitor the last loaded write-buffer address location.
4. DQ1 switches to ‘1’ when the device has aborted the write-to-buffer operation.
106
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS
Storage Temperature
Plastic Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . –65°C to +150°C
20 ns
20 ns
+0.8 V
Ambient Temperature
with Power Applied. . . . . . . . . . . . . . –65°C to +125°C
–0.5 V
–2.0 V
Voltage with Respect to Ground
VCC (Note 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .–0.5 V to +4.0 V
VIO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .–0.5 V to +4.0 V
20 ns
A9, OE#, ACC, and RESET#
(Note 2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .–0.5 V to +12.5 V
Figure 10. Maximum Negative
Overshoot Waveform
All other pins (Note 1) . . . . . . –0.5 V to VCC +0.5 V
Output Short Circuit Current (Note 3) . . . . . . 200 mA
Notes:
1. Minimum DC voltage on input or I/O pins is –0.5 V.
During voltage transitions, input or I/O pins may
overshoot VSS to –2.0 V for periods of up to 20 ns.
Maximum DC voltage on input or I/O pins is VCC +0.5 V.
See Figure 10. During voltage transitions, input or I/O
pins may overshoot to VCC +2.0 V for periods up to 20 ns.
See Figure 11.
20 ns
VCC
+2.0 V
VCC
+0.5 V
2. Minimum DC input voltage on pins A9, OE#, ACC, and
RESET# is –0.5 V. During voltage transitions, A9, OE#,
ACC, and RESET# may overshoot VSS to –2.0 V for
periods of up to 20 ns. See Figure 10. Maximum DC
input voltage on pin A9, OE#, ACC, and RESET# is
+12.5 V which may overshoot to +14.0 V for periods up
to 20 ns.
2.0 V
20 ns
20 ns
Figure 11. Maximum Positive
Overshoot Waveform
3. No more than one output may be shorted to ground at a
time. Duration of the short circuit should not be greater
than one second.
Stresses above those listed under “Absolute Maximum
Ratings” may cause permanent damage to the device. This
is a stress rating only; functional operation of the device at
these or any other conditions above those indicated in the
operational sections of this data sheet is not implied.
Exposure of the device to absolute maximum rating
conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability.
OPERATING RANGES
Industrial (I) Devices
Ambient Temperature (TA) . . . . . . . . . –40°C to +85°C
Supply Voltages
VCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7–3.1 V
VIO (Note 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7–3.1V
Notes:
1. Operating ranges define those limits between which the
functionality of the device is guaranteed.
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
107
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
DC CHARACTERISTICS
CMOS Compatible
Parameter
Symbol
Parameter Description
(Notes)
Test Conditions
VIN = VSS to VCC
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
,
ILI
Input Load Current (1)
1.0
µA
VCC = VCC max
ILIT
ILR
ACC Input Load Current
Reset Leakage Current
VCC = VCC max
35
35
µA
µA
VCC = VCC max; RESET# = 12.5 V
VOUT = VSS to VCC
VCC = VCC max
,
ILO
Output Leakage Current
1.0
µA
5 MHz
1 MHz
15
15
30
10
50
20
20
50
20
60
VCC Active Read Current
(2, 3)
ICC1
CE# = VIL, OE# = VIH,
mA
ICC2
ICC3
ICC4
VCC Initial Page Read Current (2, 3)
VCC Intra-Page Read Current (2, 3)
VCC Active Write Current (3, 4)
CE# = VIL, OE# = VIH
CE# = VIL, OE# = VIH
CE# = VIL, OE# = VIH
mA
mA
mA
CE#, RESET# = VCC 0.3 V,
WP# = VIH
ICC5
ICC6
ICC7
VCC Standby Current (3)
VCC Reset Current (3)
1
1
1
5
5
5
µA
µA
µA
RESET# = VSS 0.3 V, WP# = VIH
VIH = VCC 0.3 V;
VIL = VSS 0.3 V, WP# = VIH
Automatic Sleep Mode (3, 5)
VIL1
VIH1
VIL2
VIH2
Input Low Voltage 1(6, 7)
Input High Voltage 1 (6, 7)
Input Low Voltage 2 (6, 8)
Input High Voltage 2 (6, 8)
–0.5
1.9
0.8
V
V
V
V
VCC + 0.5
0.3 x VIO
VIO + 0.5
–0.5
1.9
Voltage for ACC Program
Acceleration
VHH
VID
VCC = 2.7 –3.3 V
11.5
11.5
12.5
V
V
Voltage for Autoselect and Temporary
Sector Unprotect
VCC = 2.7 –3.3 V
12.5
VOL
VOH1
Output Low Voltage (9)
IOL = 2.0 mA, VCC = VCC min = VIO
0.15 x VIO
V
V
V
V
IOH = –2.0 mA, VCC = VCC min = VIO 0.85 VIO
Output High Voltage
VOH2
IOH = –100 µA, VCC = VCC min = VIO
VIO–0.4
2.3
VLKO
Low VCC Lock-Out Voltage (10)
2.5
Notes:
1. On the WP#/ACC pin only, the maximum input load current when WP# = VIL is 5.0 µA.
2. The ICC current listed is typically less than 2 mA/MHz, with OE# at VIH.
3. Maximum ICC specifications are tested with VCC = VCCmax.
4. ICC active while Embedded Erase or Embedded Program is in progress.
5. Automatic sleep mode enables the low power mode when addresses remain stable for tACC + 30 ns.
6. If VIO < VCC, maximum VIL for CE# and DQ I/Os is 0.3 VIO. If VIO < VCC, minimum VIH for CE# and DQ I/Os is 0.7 VIO. Maximum VIH
for these connections is VIO + 0.3 V.
7. VCC voltage requirements.
8. VIO voltage requirements.
9. Includes RY/BY#
10. Not 100% tested.
108
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
TEST CONDITIONS
Table 11. Test Specifications
Test Condition All Speeds
Output Load 1 TTL gate
3.1 V
Unit
2.7 kΩ
Device
Under
Test
Output Load Capacitance, CL
(including jig capacitance)
30
pF
Input Rise and Fall Times
Input Pulse Levels
5
ns
V
C
L
6.2 kΩ
0.0–3.0
Input timing measurement
reference levels (See Note)
1.5
V
V
Output timing measurement
reference levels
0.5 VIO
Note: Diodes are IN3064 or equivalent
Figure 12. Test Setup
Note: If VIO < VCC, the reference level is 0.5 VIO.
KEY TO SWITCHING WAVEFORMS
WAVEFORM
INPUTS
OUTPUTS
Steady
Changing from H to L
Changing from L to H
Changing, State Unknown
Don’t Care, Any Change Permitted
Does Not Apply
Center Line is High Impedance State (High Z)
3.0 V
1.5 V
0.5 VIO V
Input
Measurement Level
Output
0.0 V
Note: If VIO < VCC, the input measurement reference level is 0.5 VIO.
Figure 13. Input Waveforms and
Measurement Levels
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
109
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
AC CHARACTERISTICS
Read-Only Operations
Parameter
JEDEC
tAVAV
Std. Description
Test Setup
All Speed Options Unit
tRC Read Cycle Time (Note 1)
tACC Address to Output Delay
Min
110
110
110
30
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
tAVQV
CE#, OE# = VIL Max
tELQV
tCE Chip Enable to Output Delay
tPACC Page Access Time
OE# = VIL
Max
Max
Max
Max
Max
tGLQV
tEHQZ
tGHQZ
tOE Output Enable to Output Delay
tDF Chip Enable to Output High Z (Note 1)
tDF Output Enable to Output High Z (Note 1)
30
16
16
Output Hold Time From Addresses, CE# or OE#,
Whichever Occurs First
tAXQX
tOH
Min
Min
Min
0
0
ns
ns
ns
Read
Output Enable Hold
tOEH
Toggle and
Data# Polling
Time (Note 1)
10
Notes:
1. Not 100% tested.
2. See Figure 12 and Table 13 for test specifications.
3. AC Specifications listed are tested with VIO = VCC. Contact AMD for information on AC operation with VIO ≠ VCC
.
tRC
Addresses Stable
Addresses
tACC
CE# or CE2#
tRH
tRH
tDF
tOE
OE#
tOEH
WE#
Data
tCE
tOH
HIGH Z
HIGH Z
Valid Data
RESET#
RY/BY#
0 V
Figure 14. Read Operation Timings
110
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
AC CHARACTERISTICS
Same Page
A21
-
-
A2
A0
A1
Ad
Aa
tACC
Ab
tPACC
Ac
tPACC
tPACC
Data Bus
Qa
Qb
Qc
Qd
CE#
OE#
* Figure shows device in word mode. Addresses are A1–A-1 for byte mode.
Figure 15. Page Read Timings
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
111
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
AC CHARACTERISTICS
Hardware Reset (RESET#)
Parameter
JEDEC
Std.
Description
RESET# Pin Low (During Embedded Algorithms)
All Speed Options
Unit
tReady
Max
Max
20
µs
to Read Mode (See Note)
RESET# Pin Low (NOT During Embedded
Algorithms) to Read Mode (See Note)
tReady
500
ns
tRP
tRH
RESET# Pulse Width
Min
Min
Min
500
50
ns
ns
µs
Reset High Time Before Read (See Note)
RESET# Low to Standby Mode
tRPD
20
Notes:
1. Not 100% tested.
2. AC Specifications listed are tested with VIO = VCC. Contact AMD for information on AC operation with VIO ≠ VCC
.
RY/BY#
CE# or CE2#, OE#
RESET#
tRH
tRP
tReady
Reset Timings NOT during Embedded Algorithms
Reset Timings during Embedded Algorithms
tReady
RY/BY#
tRB
CE# or CE2#, OE#
RESET#
tRP
Figure 16. Reset Timings
112
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
AC CHARACTERISTICS
Erase and Program Operations
Parameter
JEDEC
tAVAV
Std.
tWC
tAS
Description
All Speed Options
Unit
ns
Write Cycle Time (Note 1)
Address Setup Time
Min
Min
110
0
tAVWL
ns
Address Setup Time to OE# low during toggle bit
polling
tASO
tAH
Min
Min
Min
15
45
0
ns
ns
ns
tWLAX
Address Hold Time
Address Hold Time From CE# or OE# high
during toggle bit polling
tAHT
tDVWH
tWHDX
tDS
tDH
Data Setup Time
Min
Min
Min
45
0
ns
ns
ns
Data Hold Time
tOEPH
Output Enable High during toggle bit polling
20
Read Recovery Time Before Write
(OE# High to WE# Low)
tGHWL
tGHWL
Min
0
ns
tELWL
tWHEH
tWLWH
tWHDL
tCS
tCH
CE# Setup Time
Min
Min
Min
Min
Typ
Typ
Typ
Typ
Typ
0
0
ns
ns
ns
ns
µs
µs
µs
µs
µs
µs
CE# Hold Time
tWP
Write Pulse Width
35
tWPH
Write Pulse Width High
Write Buffer Program Operation (Notes 2, 3)
30
352
11
Per Byte
Effective Write Buffer Program
Operation (Notes 2, 4)
Per Word
22
Per Byte
8.8
17.6
100
100
90
Accelerated Effective Write Buffer
Program Operation (Notes 2, 4)
tWHWH1
tWHWH1
Per Word
Byte
Single Word/Byte Program
Operation (Note 2, 5)
Typ
Typ
Word
Byte
Single Word/Byte Accelerated
Programming Operation (Note 2, 5)
Word
90
µs
sec
ns
tWHWH2
tWHWH2 Sector Erase Operation (Note 2)
Typ
Min
Min
Min
0.5
250
50
tVHH
tVCS
VHH Rise and Fall Time (Note 1)
VCC Setup Time (Note 1)
µs
tBUSY
WE# High to RY/BY# Low
110
ns
Notes:
1. Not 100% tested.
2. See the “Erase and Programming Performance” section for more information.
3. For 1–16 words/1–32 bytes programmed.
4. Effective write buffer specification is based upon a 16-word/32-byte write buffer operation.
5. Word/Byte programming specification is based upon a single word/byte programming operation not utilizing the write buffer.
6. AC Specifications listed are tested with VIO = VCC. Contact AMD for information on AC operation with VIO ≠ VCC
.
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
113
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
AC CHARACTERISTICS
Program Command Sequence (last two cycles)
Read Status Data (last two cycles)
tAS
PA
tWC
Addresses
555h
PA
PA
tAH
CE# or CE2#
OE#
tCH
tWHWH1
tWP
WE#
Data
tWPH
tCS
tDS
tDH
PD
DOUT
A0h
Status
tBUSY
tRB
RY/BY#
VCC
tVCS
Notes:
1. PA = program address, PD = program data, DOUT is the true data at the program address.
2. Illustration shows device in word mode.
Figure 17. Program Operation Timings
VHH
VIL or VIH
VIL or VIH
ACC
tVHH
tVHH
Figure 18. Accelerated Program Timing Diagram
114
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
AC CHARACTERISTICS
Erase Command Sequence (last two cycles)
Read Status Data
VA
tAS
SA
tWC
VA
Addresses
CE# or CE2#
OE#
2AAh
555h for chip erase
tAH
tCH
tWP
WE#
tWPH
tWHWH2
tCS
tDS
tDH
Data
Status
D
OUT
55h
30h
10 for Chip Erase
tBUSY
tRB
RY/BY#
tVCS
VCC
Notes:
1. SA = sector address (for Sector Erase), VA = Valid Address for reading status data (see “Write Operation Status”.
2. Illustration shows device in word mode.
Figure 19. Chip/Sector Erase Operation Timings
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
115
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
AC CHARACTERISTICS
tRC
Addresses
VA
tACC
tCE
VA
VA
CE# or CE2#
tCH
tOE
OE#
WE#
tOEH
tDF
tOH
High Z
High Z
DQ7
Valid Data
Complement
Complement
True
DQ6–DQ0
Status Data
True
Valid Data
Status Data
tBUSY
RY/BY#
Note: VA = Valid address. Illustration shows first status cycle after command sequence, last status read cycle, and array data
read cycle.
Figure 20. Data# Polling Timings (During Embedded Algorithms)
116
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
AC CHARACTERISTICS
tAHT
tAS
Addresses
tAHT
tASO
CE# or CE2#
tCEPH
tOEH
WE#
tOEPH
OE#
tDH
Valid Data
tOE
Valid
Status
Valid
Status
Valid
Status
DQ6/DQ2
RY/BY#
Valid Data
(first read)
(second read)
(stops toggling)
Note: VA = Valid address; not required for DQ6. Illustration shows first two status cycle after command sequence, last status
read cycle, and array data read cycle
Figure 21. Toggle Bit Timings (During Embedded Algorithms)
Enter
Embedded
Erasing
Erase
Suspend
Enter Erase
Suspend Program
Erase
Resume
Erase
Erase Suspend
Read
Erase
Suspend
Program
Erase
Complete
WE#
Erase
Erase Suspend
Read
DQ6
DQ2
Note: DQ2 toggles only when read at an address within an erase-suspended sector. The system may use OE# or CE# to toggle
DQ2 and DQ6.
Figure 22. DQ2 vs. DQ6
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
117
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
AC CHARACTERISTICS
Temporary Sector Unprotect
Parameter
JEDEC
Std
Description
All Speed Options
Unit
tVIDR
VID Rise and Fall Time (See Note)
Min
Min
500
ns
RESET# Setup Time for Temporary Sector
Unprotect
tRSP
4
µs
Notes:
1. Not 100% tested.
2. AC Specifications listed are tested with VIO = VCC. Contact AMD for information on AC operation with VIO ≠ VCC
.
VID
VID
RESET#
VIL or VIH
VIL or VIH
tVIDR
tVIDR
Program or Erase Command Sequence
CE# or CE2#
WE#
tRRB
tRSP
RY/BY#
Figure 23. Temporary Sector Group Unprotect Timing Diagram
118
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
AC CHARACTERISTICS
V
ID
IH
V
RESET#
SA, A6,
A3, A2,
A1, A0
Valid*
Valid*
Valid*
Status
Sector Group Protect or Unprotect
Verify
40h
Data
60h
60h
Sector Group Protect: 150 µs,
Sector Group Unprotect: 15 ms
1 µs
CE#
WE#
OE#
* For sector group protect, A6:A0 = 0xx0010. For sector group unprotect, A6:A0 = 1xx0010.
Figure 24. Sector Group Protect and Unprotect Timing Diagram
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
119
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
AC CHARACTERISTICS
Alternate CE# Controlled Erase and Program Operations
Parameter
JEDEC
tAVAV
Std.
tWC
tAS
Description
Speed Options
Unit
ns
Write Cycle Time (Note 1)
Address Setup Time
Address Hold Time
Data Setup Time
Data Hold Time
Min
Min
Min
Min
Min
110
0
tAVWL
tELAX
tDVEH
tEHDX
ns
tAH
45
45
0
ns
tDS
ns
tDH
ns
Read Recovery Time Before Write
(OE# High to WE# Low)
tGHEL
tGHEL
Min
0
ns
tWLEL
tEHWH
tELEH
tEHEL
tWS
tWH
tCP
WE# Setup Time
Min
Min
Min
Min
Typ
0
0
ns
ns
ns
ns
µs
µs
µs
µs
µs
WE# Hold Time
CE# Pulse Width
45
30
352
tCPH
CE# Pulse Width High
Write Buffer Program Operation (Notes 2, 3)
Effective Write Buffer Program
Operation (Notes 2, 4)
Per Word
Typ
22
Accelerated Effective Write Buffer
Program Operation (Notes 2, 4)
Per Word
Word
Typ
Typ
17.6
100
tWHWH1
tWHWH1
Single Word/Byte Program
Operation (Note 2, 5)
µs
µs
Single Word/Byte Accelerated
Programming Operation (Note 2,
5)
Word
Typ
90
tWHWH2
tWHWH2 Sector Erase Operation (Note 2)
tRH RESET# High Time Before Write
Typ
Min
0.5
50
sec
ns
Notes:
1. Not 100% tested.
2. See the “Erase and Programming Performance” section for more information.
3. For 1–16 words/1–32 bytes programmed.
4. Effective write buffer specification is based upon a 16-word/32-byte write buffer operation.
5. Word/Byte programming specification is based upon a single word/byte programming operation not utilizing the write buffer.
6. AC Specifications listed are tested with VIO = VCC. Contact AMD for information on AC operation with VIO ≠ VCC
.
120
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
555 for program
PA for program
2AA for erase
SA for sector erase
555 for chip erase
Data# Polling
Addresses
PA
tWC
tWH
tAS
tAH
WE#
OE#
tGHEL
tWHWH1 or 2
tCP
CE# or CE2#
tWS
tCPH
tDS
tBUSY
tDH
DQ7#
DOUT
Data
tRH
A0 for program
55 for erase
PD for program
30 for sector erase
10 for chip erase
RESET#
RY/BY#
Notes:
1. Figure indicates last two bus cycles of a program or erase operation.
2. PA = program address, SA = sector address, PD = program data.
3. DQ7# is the complement of the data written to the device. DOUT is the data written to the device.
4. Illustration shows device in word mode.
Figure 25. Alternate CE# Controlled Write (Erase/Program)
Operation Timings
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
121
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
ERASE AND PROGRAMMING PERFORMANCE
Parameter
Typ (Note 1) Max (Note 2)
Unit
sec
sec
µs
Comments
Sector Erase Time
0.5
32
15
Chip Erase Time
128
TBD
Single Word Program Time (Note 3)
Word
Word
100
Accelerated Single Word Program Time
(Note 3)
90
TBD
µs
Total Write Buffer Program Time (Note 4)
352
22
TBD
TBD
µs
µs
Effective Write Buffer Program Time (Note 3) Per Word
Total Accelerated Effective Write Buffer
Program Time (Note 4)
282
TBD
µs
Effective Accelerated Write Buffer PRogram
Time (Note 4)
Word
17.6
92
TBD
TBD
µs
Chip Program Time
sec
Notes:
1. Typical program and erase times assume the following conditions: 25°C, 3.0 V VCC. Programming specifications assume that
all bits are programmed to 00h.
2. Maximum values are measured at VCC = 3.0 V, worst case temperature. Maximum values are valid up to and including 100,000
program/erase cycles.
3. Word programming specification is based upon a single word programming operation not utilizing the write buffer.
4. For 1-16 words programmed in a single write buffer programming operation.
5. Effective write buffer specification is calculated on a per-word basis for a 16-word write buffer operation.
6. In the pre-programming step of the Embedded Erase algorithm, all bits are programmed to 00h before erasure.
7. System-level overhead is the time required to execute the command sequence(s) for the program command. See Tables 12 and
11 for further information on command definitions.
8. The device has a minimum erase and program cycle endurance of 100,000 cycles.
LATCHUP CHARACTERISTICS
Description
Min
Max
Input voltage with respect to VSS on all pins except I/O pins
(including OE#, and RESET#)
–1.0 V
12.5 V
Input voltage with respect to VSS on all I/O pins
VCC Current
–1.0 V
VCC + 1.0 V
+100 mA
–100 mA
Note: Includes all pins except VCC. Test conditions: VCC = 3.0 V, one pin at a time.
122
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
PACKAGE PIN CAPACITANCE
Parameter
Symbol
Parameter Description
Input Capacitance
Test Setup
VIN = 0
Typ
11
Max
26
Unit
pF
CIN
COUT
CIN2
CIN3
Output Capacitance
VOUT = 0
VIN = 0
12
28
pF
Control Pin Capacitance
WP#/ACC Pin Capacitance
14
28
pF
VIN = 0
17
20
pF
Notes:
1. Sampled, not 100% tested.
2. Test conditions TA = 25°C, f = 1.0 MHz.
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
123
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS
FUA093—93-Ball Fine-Pitch Grid Array 13 x 9 mm package
A
D1
D
eD
0.15
(2X)
C
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SE
7
E
B
E1
eE
L
J
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
M
K
INDEX MARK
10
PIN A1
CORNER
PIN A1
CORNER
7
TOP VIEW
SIDE VIEW
0.15
(2X)
C
SD
BOTTOM VIEW
0.20
0.08
C
A2
A
C
C
A1
6
93X
b
0.15
0.08
M
M
C
C
A B
NOTES:
PACKAGE
JEDEC
FUA 093
N/A
1. DIMENSIONING AND TOLERANCING METHODS PER
ASME Y14.5M-1994.
2. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS.
13.00 mm x 9.00 mm
PACKAGE
3. BALL POSITION DESIGNATION PER JESD 95-1, SPP-010.
SYMBOL
MIN
---
NOM
---
MAX
1.40
NOTE
4.
e REPRESENTS THE SOLDER BALL GRID PITCH.
A
A1
PROFILE
5. SYMBOL "MD" IS THE BALL MATRIX SIZE IN THE "D"
DIRECTION.
0.16
1.06
---
---
BALL HEIGHT
SYMBOL "ME" IS THE BALL MATRIX SIZE IN THE
"E" DIRECTION.
A2
---
1.21
BODY THICKNESS
BODY SIZE
D
13.00 BSC.
9.00 BSC.
8.80 BSC.
7.20 BSC.
12
n IS THE NUMBER OF POPULTED SOLDER BALL POSITIONS
FOR MATRIX SIZE MD X ME.
E
BODY SIZE
D1
E1
MATRIX FOOTPRINT
MATRIX FOOTPRINT
6
7
DIMENSION "b" IS MEASURED AT THE MAXIMUM BALL
DIAMETER IN A PLANE PARALLEL TO DATUM C.
SD AND SE ARE MEASURED WITH RESPECT TO DATUMS A
AND B AND DEFINE THE POSITION OF THE CENTER SOLDER
BALL IN THE OUTER ROW.
MD
ME
n
MATRIX SIZE D DIRECTION
MATRIX SIZE E DIRECTION
BALL COUNT
10
93
WHEN THERE IS AN ODD NUMBER OF SOLDER BALLS IN THE
OUTER ROW SD OR SE = 0.000.
φb
0.31
---
0.41
BALL DIAMETER
WHEN THERE IS AN EVEN NUMBER OF SOLDER BALLS IN THE
OUTER ROW, SD OR SE = e/2
eE
0.80 BSC.
0.80 BSC
0.40 BSC.
BALL PITCH
eD
SD / SE
BALL PITCH
8. "+" INDICATES THE THEORETICAL CENTER OF DEPOPULATED
BALLS.
SOLDER BALL PLACEMENT
DEPOPULATED SOLDER BALLS
A2,A3,A4,A5,A6,A7,A8,A9,C10,D1,D10,
E1,E10,H1,H10,J1,J10,K1,K10
M2,M3,M4,M5,M6,M7,M8,M9
9. N/A
10 A1 CORNER TO BE IDENTIFIED BY CHAMFER, LASER OR INK
MARK, METALLIZED MARK INDENTATION OR OTHER MEANS.
3300 \ 16-038.21a
124
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
November 24, 2003
A D V A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N
REVISION SUMMARY
Operating Ranges
Revision A (August 16, 2003)
Corrected Vccf/Vccs standard voltage range max from
3.3 V to 3.1 V.
Initial release.
Revision A+1 (September 3, 2003)
DC Characteristics
Connection Diagrams
Test Condition IOL of VOL updated from 4.0 mA to 2.0
mA.
Corrected ball grid labels for balls K9 and L7–L9 on
both Am70PDL127CDH and Am70PDL129CDH con-
nection diagrams.
Test Conditions
Corrected max voltage from 3.3 V to 3.1 V.
Revision A+2 (November 24, 2003)
SecSiTM (Secured Silicon) Sector Flash Memory
Region
Device Information
Removed Reference to Page Mode for pSRAM.
Customer Lockable Area (64 words): Clarified text
under first bullet and added SecSi Sector Protection
Algorithm figure.
Distinctive Characteristics, Flash Memory
Features (Data Storage)
Table 17, Sector Protection Command Definitions
Removed Reference to VIO.
Corrected number of cycles for SecSi Protection Bit
Status, PPMLB Status, and SPMLB Status to 5 cycles.
For these command sequences, inserted a cycle be-
fore the final read cycle (RD0).
Product Selector Guide
Corrected pSRAM access times.
pSRAM AC Characteristics
Corrected Speed Bins to 66/85 ns.
Trademarks
Copyright © 2003 Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. All rights reserved.
AMD, the AMD logo, and combinations thereof are registered trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.
November 24, 2003
Am70PDL127CDH/Am70PDL129CDH
125
相关型号:
SI9130DB
5- and 3.3-V Step-Down Synchronous ConvertersWarning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY
SI9135LG-T1
SMBus Multi-Output Power-Supply ControllerWarning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY
SI9135LG-T1-E3
SMBus Multi-Output Power-Supply ControllerWarning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY
SI9135_11
SMBus Multi-Output Power-Supply ControllerWarning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY
SI9136_11
Multi-Output Power-Supply ControllerWarning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY
SI9130CG-T1-E3
Pin-Programmable Dual Controller - Portable PCsWarning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY
SI9130LG-T1-E3
Pin-Programmable Dual Controller - Portable PCsWarning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY
SI9130_11
Pin-Programmable Dual Controller - Portable PCsWarning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY
SI9137
Multi-Output, Sequence Selectable Power-Supply Controller for Mobile ApplicationsWarning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY
SI9137DB
Multi-Output, Sequence Selectable Power-Supply Controller for Mobile ApplicationsWarning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY
SI9137LG
Multi-Output, Sequence Selectable Power-Supply Controller for Mobile ApplicationsWarning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY
SI9122E
500-kHz Half-Bridge DC/DC Controller with Integrated Secondary Synchronous Rectification DriversWarning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 217
-
VISHAY
©2020 ICPDF网 联系我们和版权申明